Home

"service manual"

1. 035236912 Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 In Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner NOTE Position the front seat to at least a mid track position to provide easier access to the storage bin An in floor storage bin is located behind each front seat Each 1 6 gal 5 9 1 bin can hold up to 12 12 oz 0 35 1 cans plus ice or other items The removable bin liner allows for easy filling emptying and cleaning 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To access the bin position the floor mat aside if The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on equipped Pull the door latch release loop upward to the notches as shown release the latch and then forward to open the bin door p 035236911 035236910 Removable Liner In Floor Storage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 CARGO AREA FEATURES To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station in the left rear quarter trim panel To remove it press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and release 035410217 Three Press Switch NOTE Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation the next time you need it Rechargeable Flashl
2. 494 W Vehicle Storage iese ien 58 E ERE eee ds 497 l Replacement Bulbs 497 B Bulb Replacement 4 499 O Front Low High Beam Headlamp Turn Signal Park Lamp And Side Marker Lamp 499 OPront Fog Lamp sis EE PRE EE reta DRA 200 O Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp 501 O License Plate Lam au casco EER ab dae an 503 W Fluid Capacities ii asb ea be ak R diep d 505 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 506 EE HEI ETTA ESTEET ETETETT TETERE T 506 AOM MERE OE NO HY OE ROET 507 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 070307227 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 11 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L W Q es JO 5 O o Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 8 Engine Oil Fill N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle i
3. 272 Matenas Added essre RED RS RED HE oe 395 hrs du iore see HER HEERS GEROER RE 394 gane RAUDE vase Popes A HARD EIE 393 506 Requirements sasie KERE RUE RD ete es 393 Paver Wl0de garar pingid oe eget Sas 276 SDOGIFICILIOHS 2 30 9 94 4o irritiert titit 506 Tank Capa eiue 2 93 2639 HERALD ee os 505 Puel OP UIE 2 6 6 bran he A oh ERG bees 276 iek DAVE dae vans ome ce EDE WE RCNH ae ees 276 Fuel System Cahon isi si ceo eae Borde es 402 F el Flexible co ac 2h enews oe ODE eo Be 397 FUCHS claus gence HR DE ROME eee an ours E 401 lg H r 49 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 220 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap scat 401 455 Gasoline Fuel CONSCIVING os exi ROKER RS ease nes ss Gasoline Clean Air 544 INDEX NEE Id Gasoline Reformulated 393 Gauges Coolant Temperature id ase arde nd ans 266 POC 5 ao ade ota EE EO EE SG 266 PELOT 4 440608 a datar deba E eta age 266 Tachometer us uua o mh Ete Sod EE es 259 sear Raliges 424545 eo ea ne ee yee ee oes 340 Gear Select Lever Override nananana 445 EE oe eGo seco AG ad SG we Bee EN OS Oe 340 General Information 17 25 127 159 344 392 General Maintenance ees 458 Glass Ela vas HERALD Boke e ees 490 Gross Axle Weight Rating ace sie ee ren ces 404 406 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 404 405 GVWR nuo EE N N d xu dob pU P dod ES 404 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow lai
4. 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of th
5. O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle ss 4444 445 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch START STOP Oy 3 ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC
6. 3 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts For vehicles so equipped remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel 060641615 Rear Jacking Location 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise with the jack handle Raise the vehicle until the tire just clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 6 Install the spare tire N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435 CAUTION NO LE e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the cae e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use spare tire is mounted incorrectly Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 7 Install the wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel
7. 383 ELE AGE Oye Cl wage 3 age Ge kaos oe DOER ES 386 D Premium System If Equipped 388 O General Information N Fuel Requirements O Reformulated Gasoline 993 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 394 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 304 o MMT In Gasoline 2239292499 3x3 395 o Materials Added To Fuel 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id O Fuel System Cautions 454446246 a RE 390 Ma dii Fuel ss 5 4 4544498 SONS RAD ORDE 401 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings a97 O Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap sasie See ER RE 401 W Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 403 ee EG 97 W Vehicle LONE sees ESEG PERSE 403 E id O Vehicle Certification Label 22 meos 403 D Ethanol Fuel E 85 EES SS SS ss 399 4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR A04 O Foel Reguirements 3 9 St EYE DEE 399 4 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR A04 MEUM EN cae HOMME DE 404 ELE n pedcs GER DOORS RED KOR oy ge 400 a OG 200 TE RE EN 400 Mi Trailer Towing eres 405 Replacement Parts ee A01 O0 Common Towing Definitions 405 O Trailer Hiteh Classification ss aues soe Sa ross 410 DE Maintenance soda aaa 401 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 333 O Trailer Towing Weights O Towing Requirements aces 9 kr EER 414 Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 411 EE AO Ed 419 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 413 H Recreational Towing Behind
8. Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency 420 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id AutoStick If Equipped By using the AutoStick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 a lae BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC ACCON Recreational towing is not allowed DO NOT flat tow Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain
9. Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN fi 010809409 INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS owner II Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 O Keyless Ignition Node KIN 12 od de 2 24 dg ayes au Bae oe a a eae a 13 O Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 W Sentry Key EE EE OR N 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 17 O Rearming Of The System 18 ETO Atm The System 234 is aye ch a ees 18 o To Disarm The System a4 6 gero cr ee RE 19 O Security System Manual Override 20 aM Uluminated Entry 222 ESE KEER AR ED ARE 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 o To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id O Remote Open Window Feature 29 aUsing Lhe Panic Alarni oe qe OER dp dor Di 23 O Programming Additional Transmitters 24 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 E General Information 23 sad ss Ee RED 23 25 ll Remote Starting
10. Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time 68 ad FM 91 7 Settings Display Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Uconnect Touch 8 4 Soft Keys When making a selection touch the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode touch and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Once the setting is complete touch the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the setting
11. Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature NOTE The Headlights With Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Steering Control Handle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 To unlock the steering column push the control handle ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED downward To tilt the steering column move the steering When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel 40 km h outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle upward until ful
12. I EGUIPDCG ss sae ben eee senses Gees 194 E Lights On Remungder a exa oa denti BERE 194 oO Fog Lights If Equipped 194 D Multifunction Lever 222 2 222329x9 195 EL PUTA SIE HALO 6 544 28S OU EET Hs ee ae ey 195 O Lane Change Assist soe casa ghee sheen 196 o High Low Beam Switch o Flash To Pass Antenor CIENS aod E dd eer SOR OE nes 196 H Map Reading Lights ss 2 nn erts 198 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 198 EL Intermittent Wiper System swear sm 199 o Windshield Wiper Operation 200 o Windshield Washers 201 ONE ETONU vs omo d verde MEE PES 201 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM 3 Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only W Tilt Telescoping Steering Column Bl Electronic Speed Control If Equipped BERE et C AE EE EE eo o To Set A Desired Speed sms der Y d ded D To Deactivate o To Resume Speed o To Vary The Speed Setting H To Accelerate For Passing ll Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped E Parksense DensOPS 4 qs fobs beh Ro RUE B O Parksense Warning Display O Parksense Display d 44 4 4 em ote RS AT ETT 208 O Enabling And Disabling Parksense 211 O Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist aa a ahs ode E 212 O Cleaning The Parksense System 212 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 212 ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera
13. a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SE
14. for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING CAUTION e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in SENTRY KEY or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor the in the ACC or RUN position A child could ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The operate power windows other controls or move system does not need to be armed or activated Operation the vehicle is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked Do not leave children or animals inside parked or unlocked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION The Sentry Key
15. hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to Continued 398 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE the other sections of this manual for information on CAUTION Y O i CAUTION features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 81ae46ab 81ae46a9 E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 399 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e
16. Class IV Extra 10 000 lbs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 411 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine GCWR Gross Com Max GTW bined Wt Rating Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 2 AL 1 000 Ibs 454 kg which Automatic 022 Ibs 2 722 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m includes up ne Depos amp 100 Ibs 45 kg 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg which in T 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m cludes 1 to 2 persons amp Luggage 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic 1 500 Ibs 680 kg which in waa 7 300 lbs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m dudes oa persons ee sp dee 150 Ibs 68 kg Trailer Tow PE 100 Ibs 45 kg Prep Package 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sg ft 3 0 sq m mou si ME poet Except n AWD models 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Enginel GCWR Gross Com Max GTW bined Wt Rating Gross Trailer Wt ME ge WE 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sqm 200 Ibs 1588 kg which in 350 Ibs 159 kg cludes 1 to persons amp Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1 361 kg which in 3 6L 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m dudes ve d ersons amp Luggage 300 Ibs 136 kg
17. I EquipDed 222429 SR BES pd Eod PIU e Ede d 215 O Turning Parkview On Or Off With Touch Screen Radios uo rns 217 W Overhead Console EE Se 218 O Courtesy Reading Lights 218 DUNC asses SO E dus sap dre dp ER oye ne 219 B Interior Observation Mirror 219 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 O Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped 220 O Closing Sunroof Express 228 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 220 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 228 O Programming HomeLink 222 D Pinch Protect Feature ss sso hen RR RE 228 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 224 O Pinch Protect Ovemide ssagic ease rtirat Pcie HOMeCLINK ga sua tequ ca are a Gos 225 O Venting Sunroof Express H Reprogramming A Single O Sunshade Operation isses 229 RON ENS MUON TE ET 229 OWind Buffeting eee 229 AE ED e O 5unroot Maintenance sais c9 3 BED 230 oO Troubleshooting Tips s o eds eta et 226 2 Tgnition Off A 230 O General Information 226 OSunroof Fully Closed cese 230 Mo ae Pe EE educ dee id W Electrical Power Outlets 0 0 230 Be i ae a IG oi ll Power Inverter If Equipped 29D O Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 228 O Power Inverter Operation 236 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed NE UploldstS xs exo EX irau irer PERS BET 237 oO In
18. Immobilizer system is not compat After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four di
19. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buf
20. Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Lights e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Illuminated Approach Touch the Illuminated Approach soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlights With Wipers Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key to change this display When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back sof
21. The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each outboard second row passenger seat The Booster Seat is designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs 22 and 39 kg and between 47 in 119 cm and 57 in 145 cm tall To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat follow these steps 1 Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to use the Integrated Child Booster Seat 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The second row bench with Integrated Child 3 Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during booster seat position use 2 Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and seat cushion 022607263 p Booster Seat 4 Place the child upright in the seat with their back 022607262 firmly against the seatback Release Loop 5 Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 6 Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary 8 To remove the slack from the lap belt pull upward on to allow the seat belt to go around the child s lap the shoulder portion of the seat belt NOTE The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on 9 To release the seat belt push the red button on the the hips and as snug as possible buckle 2 7 Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly insert WARNING the latch plate into the buckle until you hea
22. Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information 416 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and requ
23. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC dy m O REEDE IEE INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80
24. When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the i
25. e ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automati cally adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id to high This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats The rear outlets are located in the right side trim panel of the 3rd Row seat Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature and
26. nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 11JC49 126 AE Fifth Edition Printed in U S A
27. Cargo tie downs NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 Cargo Tie Downs WARNING Cargo tie downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers Cargo tie downs are located on both rear trim panels These tie downs should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Downs 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a The weight and position of cargo and passengers can dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de scribed on the label attached to the left door or left Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped Five door center pillar Passenger Models e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put NOTE The pur
28. Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is located on the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your necessary to make the belt go around your lap passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions T 022636141 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat Pulling Out Lap Shoulder Belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the plate into the buckle until you hear a click buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing th
29. Electronic Brake Control System Trailer Sway Control TSC in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may b
30. F181 Blue ing EHPS If Equipped 50 Amp Cabin Heater 3 If F184 ae NE Front Wiper Motor 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Courtesy Reading Lamps Incandescent 578 Courtesy Reading Lamps Optional LED LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Glove Box Lamp sos oe pee etn HORE HEHE wae 194 oreo Lain conari rearen RE Few sae RS Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam Headlamp 3a oco ict e Rees 9006 High Beam Headlamp a v eese tanc sud pie ede n 9005 Front Parks Tum Signals semra we ane s 3757AK Side Marker Lamp see 168 Front Fop Lampr sae REDES HAD eso wa PSX24W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Stop Lamp ss bosse eke RE OR ds LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Liftgate Lamp soseer mero son es LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Turn Signal Lamp WY21W Dackup LaMiD toca RE ER OE HEK W21W License ND ei eer eee eo eae hee Heap 168 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 BULB REPLACEMENT Front Low High Beam Headlamp Turn Signal Park Lamp And Side Marker Lamp 1 Open the hood NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM aside to replace ce
31. Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase the blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculation mode without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters out
32. NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically NOTE All doors and th
33. SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire NS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to Ju
34. When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the EVIC CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continue
35. clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds The current display will reset along with other functions Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans lemperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Uconnect TOUCH SETTINGS The Uconnect Touch system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Hard Keys Hard Keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessibl
36. e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and failure or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 386 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will
37. n ER WK RE eae ea EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
38. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity N STARTING AND OPERATING 377 NT Fie sina MEME RE When stuck in mud sand snow or icy conditions do not Limited use spares are for emergency use only In spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without handling With this tire do not drive more than the stopping speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Fai
39. touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK but ton When Driver Door Ist Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If drive
40. value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States SS MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 FUEL REQUIREMENTS This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such STARTING AND OPERATING 393 as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms tr
41. 499 501 N INDEX 547 Rear Tall ws ues en beep eee eee ES 501 Seat Belt Reminder sis RE EER RR RR N 264 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 266 GEVE sow oud REY uu dos ees been ka 497 499 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 259 Bide Marker xia wue3 tes HERDERS DEE DI 499 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 266 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 262 383 Traction Control ie queen HEERS ues 360 Tee io vee took 9d owe ge s 93 195 499 501 Wally VEREOR 4342455 ebay eee Ee bk D 104 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 259 Load Floor CITO 4 943 ER thee RE d e 246 Loading Vehicle 6474620465 PAD sae RE Hs 403 405 Scl TFT 405 jn Cr OUS usce ne Pees en Sb eee eee EM EBEN Auto Unlock 548 INDEX NEE id Automatic Door SS SS 31 Child Protection ame 44 oe 8430 6 eas 31 DOOR av 29 Power Door SS SS ES ss 30 Low Tire Pressure Systemi sic ci pem wages 383 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ss ee woreaes ai ee eee ee NP ENS 81 83 Eubptcotlon DOdW u s ded Ere pP d RR 468 Luggage Rack Roof Rack ze wene seeeri wes 259 Maintenance Free Battery ss siet anode Cy aes 463 Maintenance Procedures seen 458 Maintenance Schedule 510 Maintenance General een 458 Maintenance Sunroof llle 230 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 259 456 Manual Transaxle Fluid Level Check ss 485 F
42. ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020235340 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect Touch system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel
43. AND OPERATING 359 Raa A N P v v TUNE SCROLL ESC OFF Button NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF button Once the situation requiring Partial Off 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation
44. Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal functioning the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SEN SORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the EVIC and the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense
45. Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the amp vR button while in a call and say Send 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Recent calls gt All Cal gt 4 All 7 Ana Conda Calls Incoming F Axel Schweiss Calls SJ Buddy s Pizza Outgoing Calle Xj 248 990 6543 James Buttler Sf D Dennett e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls e All Calls 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An In
46. Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 A RO q5 XE Dom AW a gA BA nl ELECT MM ry EXTERIOR DULA HIGH BEAM TURM SIGNALS HEATED SEAT TIOR LOCK A MM HROGEAM DARANE Line ASEET SYBTEM D 3 a4 020 tj Te X i EYETFM FUEL HERR i Dey MANTEN LIGTING LOW BEAM EY ACTIVATE LAPP LHD WER ms ming ow LIFT imr oc ya HILL DESSERT Ve PARA INTERMITTENT WIFER WITCH POWER OUTLET NS OUTLET COMTI BRAKE PEE ES a teat ty u j CV me N GT Dad amp ow M EC oy PLUS PAL SIDE REAR YVEMDON MEMEL WAS DOME LHAT PRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEANE LOWER AIH REC CULATION ELEC TAOAH ALL PHHEP PAR OF ANTHLOER WEATHER FLLE LEVEL MLET Ni BrAUum IY coq mwE Mar ETSIEM 0 0 7 wn G amp 00 c Bi wor snae MIHDEHIELD s ELECTPONIG ERAKE SYST ENGINE NL HEAT MANTEO ELEETRICALAY PARK LTS WEAR HET LAMR MEAS AE GUAT AND VENTILATING FAN RHODA LOER THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARMING PARKINWU HEATED DPEN LOWES i CUITLET OAT Rao BANE BHAKE EA um T s d ea LID fi HAUL BATTERY HEATED
47. Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway
48. Controls 12 Hood Release Lever 3 Instrument Cluster 8 SD Memory Card Slot 13 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect Touch System 9 Power Outlet 14 Headlight Switch 5 Glove Compartment 10 CD DVD Slot 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040436362 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 2 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information o Y UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I v an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel qualit
49. Defects 530 O In The 50 United States And Washington BEEN OM TERE OE EER ee O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 526 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire EN lei Grades was REDE emi e tus TT RSS 533 Quality Grade s sop os DR REM DS RR a aR DES 999 LU Treadwear 4 met be ee Oe DES SES HESS EO 533 O lemperatire Grades sye ans oa oh eo EE AE 534 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 527 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
50. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Models With Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror position following an adjustment NOTE A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position NOTE Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h will disable the folding feature If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 5 mph 8 km h they will automatically unfold Manual Folding Mirrors If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions forward rearward and normal Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear win
51. FUEL message and a new DTE value will display 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to
52. Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner 243 hees e Sor vcio ET EE HEET TEL Rd 239 ME Area HER dies eutuduseagteassca tf 245 O Glovebox Storage si scm Red RR hess 259 o Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped 245 O Floor Console Storage cisco des Sp yes 239 HU Cargo Management System 246 LU Center Console Slordge uos HEL WAR dde s 240 M Rear Window Features 250 O Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat o Rear Window Wiper Washer 250 ux E ids O Rear Window Defroster i esee 252 O Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary Eloise DID a a3 9 29083 9 3 93 BR I II 242 E Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 259 O Second Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers If Equipped 243 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Manual Rearview Mirror 030407085 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Automatic Dimming Mirror If Eduipped CAUTION This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature wil
53. Id CAUTION 2 4L Engine If Equipped On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too Driving with a hot cooling system could damage hot during sustained high speed driving or if towing a your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H trailer up long grades If this happens a HOTOIL mes safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle sage will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will with the A C turned off until the pointer drops back be reduced to 48 mph 77 km h maximum until the into the normal range If the pointer remains on the engine oil temperature is reduced H and you hear continuous chimes turn the en NOTE Th i hicl i gine OFF immediately and call for service e maximum vehicle speed is reduced to 48 mph 77 km h you may reduce vehicle speed further as needed Once the engine oil temperature is reduced WARNING you may continue to drive normally You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The j
54. In a collision people preted as an indication of difficulty riding in these areas are more likely to be seri SAFETY TIPS ously injured or killed Transporting Passengers Do not allow people to ride in any area of your NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts AREA Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and WARNING using a seat belt properly On seven passenger models do not drive the e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the easy entry exit position seat cushion flipped up ward and seat moved forward as this position is Continued only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats Failure to follow this warming may result in personal injury vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e On seven passenger models do not allow a pas senger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Exhaust Gas WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these saf
55. Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Should this occur vou should stop as soon as possible E 77 and inflate the HS DER low ee de those flashing in ME OPEL er the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold Tire Pressure placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically 33 33 update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 33 33 PSI 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 5 Omi RUN 055838588 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Service TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure E dT Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini 33 33 mum of five seconds and then display dashes in a
56. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may 060633619 result in personal injury Lol Mounting Spare Tire 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise with the jack handle 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by you authorized dealer or service station 10 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 11 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage location Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 12 To stow the winch cable and retainer fit the as sembled jack handle over the winch drive nut Rotate the jack handle assembly clockwise until you hear t
57. Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer TSC activates automatically once the excessively swaying trailer is recognized When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indica tor Light will flash the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying NOTE The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING e TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations
58. Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your NS TA TING AND OPERATING 375 vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original eguip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spa
59. Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 514 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN id 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 24 000 miles 39 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 515 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even
60. Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp e Button is used to mi get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command EVR Button VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The EVR button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the EVR button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after m
61. RE RE RE 414 uo 419 Trailer and Tongue Weight 413 let s ues EE EE RO PUE doe dem 417 Trailer TOWNE XOU 7 3s 93 9 ER rirerire 411 Trailer Weight 556 INDEX NEE Id Transaxle Additives Automatic Autostick I Ae Maintenance Operation Overdrive Selection of Lubricant EEUE so AA 6 444 Ud op OE Pe Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transporting Pets Tread Wear Indicators Trip Odometer 482 343 JOD vani osos 29 ewe PES eye Es 195 261 501 DCICOBDeGIOP set eee see 2 dade Dae DA eG a 308 Underhood Fuses ll SS ss ss ee 494 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 1 3 6x be Rd 533 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 308 Universal Transmitter s x9 RE x3 220 Unleaded Gasoline 0 000000008 393 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 51 Upholstery Cae son deAR HR ee ie Sora ee os s 489 vanity ii P 104 Vehicle Certification Label 403 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vecie Loading PD 368 403 405 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 VOM cle Ora e suu pg doa dee b S PE REEDE es 325 497 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 N INDEX 557 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System soe ee ER bee e 307 Viscosity Eng uie OU o
62. Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your sel
63. System If Equipped 25 O How To Use Remote Start sr SEE 26 W Door Locks iese a suck ge EE EE Pe os 29 H Manual Door LOCKS tess seak c eed 29 O Power Door Locks auus ma eso eR ard 30 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOOD MERRIE ORI Pea fr E BOE ER d 31 W Keyless Enter N Go selle 34 OM Gl ETE IE EE ae ER OT 38 Ed ower Windows Dx 38 O Wind Buene oos ms EE ak AD ER A1 MT ii MMC 41 W Occupant Restraints EE ES ee 42 OLap Shoulder Belts 32263 ua dede MA ER ssas 46 D Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 51 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 52 o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR I HaulDDed oie ssc RU YER CL PET IAS 52 O Energy Management Feature ids etes 93 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 9993s 54 O Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR ROU DEG sis 925 pin eo ne OU 54 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 H Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAler 9 ie ER 654 Ree eee aad EE S D Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Elect Belt Extender soa ad xb seb ER PE EUR S O Supplemental Restraint System SRS D nj TII H Advanced Front Air Bag Features O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls D Event Data Recorder EDR 58 60 60 61 63 67 D Child Restraints W Engine Break In Recommendations W Safety Tips O Transportine Passengers swa sw s SE Ek O Exhaust Gas
64. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both
65. This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR NS TA TING AND OPERATING 405 Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavi
66. To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key then by touch the arrow back soft key e Language Touch the Language soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN functions and the navigation system if eguipped Touch the English French Fran ais or Spanish Espa ol soft key to select the language preferred Then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected language e Units Touch the Units soft key to change this display When in this display you may switch the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected units of measure e Voice Response Touch the Voice Response soft key to change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Touch Screen Beep Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft key to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key then touch the arrow back soft key e Fuel Saver Display Touch the Fuel Saver Display so
67. U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 520 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 128 000 miles 208 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 120 000 miles 195 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Change the automatic transmission fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid and filter s Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Replace the accessory drive belt s damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Si
68. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 2 7s 045636687 Rear Climate Controls 4 3 Screen 1 Blower Up Soft Key 2 Mode Soft Key 3 Temperature Soft Key 4 Blower Down Soft Key 5 Done Soft Key 6 Rear Lock Soft Key 7 Rear Off Soft Key 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 045636686 Rear Climate Controls 8 4 Screen 1 Rear Auto Soft Key 6 Blower Up Soft Key 2 Rear Lock Soft Key 7 Mode Soft Key 3 Front Climate Soft Key 8 Blower Down Soft Key 4 Temperature Up Soft Key 9 Rear Off Soft Key 5 Temperature Down Soft Key Rear Lock Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft key on the Uconnect Touch screen illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front Uconnect Touch system Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off The rear ATC is located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 045635064 Rear ATC Control Features 3 Rear MODE 4 Rear Temperature Lock 1 Blower Speed 2 Rear Temperature e Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Uconnect Touch screen This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 e Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs
69. VEHICLE M For vehicles eguipped with third row seating there are WARNING additional cupholders located in the trim panels In addition to cupholders vehicles may also be eguipped If containers of hot liguid are placed in the bottle with bottle holders The bottle holders are located on the door trim panels holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury 035236179 Door Bottle Holder N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 STORAGE Floor Console Storage An open storage area or cubby bin is located in the floor console Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Pull on the release handle to open the glovebox storage compart ment Lun 035236180 Floor Console Cubby Bin 035236181 Glovebox Storage Compartment 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Center Console Storage There is a storage compartment located under the center console armrest X m ossa LA N zu 035236183 Opened Storage Compartment Sliding Armrest The center console armrest can also be slid rearward for Center Console easy access to the storage area Pull upward on the release handle located on the front of the lid to open the storage compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 WARNING Do not operate this vehicle wit
70. Vehicle Not in Park Key Left Vehicle Key Not Detected e Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start Service Keyless System Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more doors open with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more doors open with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Low Tire Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Starting And Operating Service TPM System with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure Monitor in Starting And Operating ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Oper
71. a stuck vehicle Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no NOTE transmission shifting occurring If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in Starting and Operating for further information WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever Shift Lever Override Access Cover 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 5 Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the hole at the front of the center console and push the manual override
72. affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Se
73. all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again
74. an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e H
75. and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect TM Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Even though international dialing for most number combinati
76. anticipated replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte u nance period it is important that you use the same Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your ized water when mixing the water engine coolant vehicle antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warming words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To pr
77. appear If you select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen if you select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main menu 2 At the Paired Phones screen press the Add Device soft key and a pop up with instructions will appear 3 Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN 4 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take prece dence over other paired phones within range Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e Touch the Player hard key to begin e Press the Source soft key UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 e Change the Source to Bluetooth e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled Audio Device When prompted on the device select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within
78. beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country Towing Assistance where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and If you need towing assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press number
79. believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 932 e Seroice Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and dr
80. called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchors and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchors are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchors will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchors have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three second row passenger seating positions have lower anchors that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehicle s seat belts NT iS SO RV O B Latch Anchorages 022639797 1 Outer 60 Seating Position Use Lo
81. change to AM AM or FM next Satellite Satellite station Satellite frequency or Rock Stations 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 Notes 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM 2 You can replace Rock with any of the satellite music types 3 You can replace B s on 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 4 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station name received by the Radio 030536631 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice command bufon Radio will play the jeer ae ee Podcast Weekly Jekyll and Mr Auto Podcast Hyde Radio will play the Radio will play il a the genre Rock Radio will play Radio will play the album the Artist Scott ragtime favorites Joplin Radio will play the Playlist Party lunes Radio will play track 8 Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030536938 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be spoken cm any Soren when nol on a phone call after pushing lie Ueonnect voloe command button insert talking head icon on he steering wheel Screen will i ex E chanae ip Screen will Screen will Scr
82. doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 selected with or without the sound hom on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection
83. driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START ra STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will 336 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the
84. engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the causing serious personal injury ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor Do not attempt to push N tow your vehicle to setit will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat could enter the catalytic converter and once the the Normal Starting procedure engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery After Starting booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will booster battery or the battery in another vehicle decrease as the engine warms up This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire 338 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
85. ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e low road noise e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e smooth road surface e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing e fully closed windows wr number combinations may not be supported d th dition ba e e In a convert
86. for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Emergency And Towing Assistance The 911 Help numbers can only be altered These can not be deleted or the names can not be changed To change the 911 Help number follow these steps e Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the 911 Help soft key Touch the appropriate listing to alter Emergency for example e Once Emergency is touched the Edit soft key appears Touch the Edit soft key and you will be given the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default e Follow the on screen prompts to complete the task Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands
87. from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR If Equipped These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forwa
88. in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION e Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position not the LOCK OFF or ACC positions All Wheel Drive AWD The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission and or transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Front Wheel Drive FWD The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the fo
89. indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you eee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Shallow Standing Water CAUTION Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con before driving through it Never drive through standing
90. least once e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing a month that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint D e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges finish of the doors rocker panels and cargo area be kept CAUTION clear and open e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of cause which destroys the paint and protective coating paint and decals have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned
91. locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children in the vehicle alone Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons The child or others could be seriously or fatally injured They could operate the windows other vehicle controls or move the vehicle CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing f
92. message will appear the next time the vehicle is started 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal reguirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen
93. ms sod GR PAR REK VR es 462 Oil Filter Selection SEE RE 55 46 ERE Er ES 462 Bid ii x 09s 2 994 EET IE OK 459 506 ei 19 3 ELE eee eters 505 Change Interval iae RNEER es 275 460 heks sers oe oben Seen gs ee ys 459 IDIBSDIER 624604462 S550 Go bax Bees SUP A 459 PispOcd Sete ete weg dIE HER RD oes 462 uA AREA RR OE N 462 506 Filter Disposal ses 93 DOE oe eee A eh ee 462 identification LOBO a vacuos RAM HEER ene 460 Materials Added 10 auc qa SEKER RAL 462 Recommendation n 460 505 ey ide ed ER ER SEE EET A 461 VISCOS 64 4464 RM ted BEA DEE MS RS 461 505 Onboard Diagnostic System 455 456 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 220 Operating PrecauHONs ess acus dee aso gon ER oo 455 Operator Manual Owner s Manual E Outside Rearview Mirrors ese se se se se 102 rou ss VERRE AL ER OES BR RES beans 342 Overhead CONGO 244546550045 DA EDE DEE 218 Overheating Engine ese RSS 267 425 426 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 531 550 INDEX NEE Id Patt Gale ous 9294s 26752 our eae bats 486 Patto APE o oe dubio nbaened 4 HE DEAR ER RE 23 Park Sense System Real ss cet dd RENS SES 206 Parking Drake ek RES RE got ROO AES ORR He d 350 Passenger Seat Back Tilt Easy Entry System 185 Vass DIS UT va career teen cage ee Por 90S AAS 196 Pele 66554 4066 Sue eae DEE ER oe EE EF 88 Placard Tire and Loading Information 367 Power DAKOS MA EE G4 bend OE dar a
94. on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Controls The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are located on the left side of the instrument panel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Rotating the left dimmer control upward with the park Dome Light Position ing lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the the instrument panel lights second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this Rotating the right dimmer control upward with the park m position ing lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of the door map pockets and cupholders if equipped Interior Light Defeat OFF EN Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and ra
95. or end play replace if necessary L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km O C O O O L L LL M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 519 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter J Flush and replace engine coolant at Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 00 km or 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for whichever occurs first damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D
96. range NOTE If No is selected device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch to select the particular Phone or the Phone Audio soft key and then an Audio Device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Connect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Disconnect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Delete De vice soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settin
97. release lever 2 Open the center console and remove the shift lever override access cover 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE Eg 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position With Keyless Enter N Go If Eduipped l If the engine is running press the START STOP button to EA EA turn it off Release the brake pedal and press the START 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover in the STOP button once or twice to go to the ON RUN center console position Do not start the engine Then follow the in structions shown above to activate the override TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS IF transmission is operable Flat Tow Transmission in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED 25 mph 40 km h max speed Wheel Lift Or Dolly 15 miles 24 km NOT ALLOWED Tow max distance NOT ALLOWED Flatbed BEST METHOD N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 Proper towing or lifting eguipment is reguired to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other eguipment designed for the purpose following eguip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be
98. remove any buildup of snow that prevents the rear wiper blade from returning to the park position If the rear wiper control is turned off and the blade cannot return to the park position dam age to the rear wiper motor may occur CAUTION e Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on Rear Window Defroster position The rear window defroster button is located on the In cold weather always turn off the rear wiper climate control panel Press this button to turn on switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors park position before turning off the engine If the if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper when the rear window defroster is on The rear window freezes to the window damage to the rear wiper defroster automatically turns off after approximately motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 10 minutes Continued NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft clo
99. seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Recliner Adjustment The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seat lean forward slightly lift the lever lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright posi tion lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position 030936306 Seatback Release 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 030936307 Seat Height Adjustment Lever Driver s Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped The seat height control lever is located on the outboard This feature allows for exten
100. sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled to off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING front passenger as the air bags deplo
101. sucede u a Sas tee EE d 439 OIL oa uu wd ET OER 459 505 506 Oil Change Interval eris 22 cba 275 460 CUPiler Cap PED MN 453 461 ellc pr OEWER DE HA aa 462 Oil Filter Disposal lt 5 48444 4466 4420 4 605 462 Oil Selection lt sate debe Henn Saw eds 460 505 Oil MERE oue can am erac RR OAR d aser d 461 WPCIIHON e iy adage eee noes tee ceo oH 88 ecu C RED PERE 425 vcre we ga ea EE EA N ee E 334 Temperature Gange srry kesti takiri 266 Eog ie OI VISEOSIDY lt eiaccbnedeueeas aaa ge 461 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart us ere st tees 461 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 71 Entry System Illuminated 4s 444549442 SEK a5 20 PONO os 64 prener iri ea Boo AAR HE 394 542 INDEX NEE Id Event Data Recorder SS lens 74 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 42 90 397 ED SEM se coy aces ose d RC diede 90 471 Express Down Windows sao 25 Exterior Folding MITrOrS 24 sog bake 9a ves 104 Extenoi Light Detvit ausa sod song gore RE ners 499 Exterior LEDUNG duos soas aap Pea eee IS oos 192 Exte or TIS SERE RE oot eRe oe FT 93 499 Fabric Care a uuo HR EE CORE bp do does 489 Filler Location Fuel 24 i006 OE 44466464 266 401 Filters Air Cleaner 0 0 0 00 0 eee ee 462 Air Conditioning 4543442402 HERE AD 326 466 Automatic Transaxle 484 Eie Os ies RE a eas eee oe 462 506 Engine OU Disposal 33 2044 4042 He aks ER 462 Flash To Pass 0 0 ee cee eee eee 196 Flashers Hazar
102. the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS General Overview The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect Touch system display When the Uconnect Touch system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen in the
103. the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be pro tected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion prote
104. the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to 5 the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front 404 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
105. the taillamp hous ing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate 073340261 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the taillamp housing and the liftgate Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the taillamp housing from the liftgate 073340262 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 7 Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners License Plate Lamp 1 Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that position License Lamp 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Insert a small flat blade tool between the end of the lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the housing 3 Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb s electrical connector turn counterclockwise with the other hand and then separate the bulb and connector assembly from the lens 4 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 5 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens and rotate the connector turn clo
106. types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Integrated Child Booster Seat If Equipped
107. water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 FUSES Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side under the instrument panel E a F100 30 Amp 110V AC Inverter If Pi mm Equipped ETE ENL Interior Lights 20 Am Cigar Lighter in In F102 EE strument Panel Left Rear Power Outlet 20 Am Power Outlet in Con F103 A sole Bin Power Out let in Rear of Console F105 20 Amp Heated Seats If Yellow Equipped 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE s cy em 20 Amp _ Rear Power Outlet F116 30 Amp Rear Defroster EBL Yellow Pink 10 Amp Rear Camera If 10 Amp Red Equipped Red Blue Red Controller 10 Amp Climate Control 10 Amp Steering Column Con Red HVAC Red trol Module 10 Amp Spare 15 Amp Wireless Ignition Red Blue Node 20 Amp Rear HVAC Blower 25 Amp Driver Door Module Yellow Motor Natural 20 Amp Rear Wiper Motor 25 Amp Passenger Door Mod Yellow Natural ule 10 Amp _ Occupant Restraint 10 Amp All Wheel Drive If Red Controller Red Eguipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 Cartridge Mini Fuse 10 Amp Mirrors 10 Amp Steering Column Con F130 Red trol Module Cartridge Mini Fuse Fuse 15 Amp Video DVD If Blu
108. when the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 A second 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet is located inside the center console storage area Power is available with the ignition switch in the ON RUN ACC or LOCK position Front 12 Volt Power Outlet This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left of the center console This power outlet has power quarter trim panel in the cargo area This power outlet available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ON or has power available when the ignition switch is in the ACC position ON or ACC position Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced The power outlet on the bottom of the center console shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of the console The combined usage must not exceed 1
109. will result ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or damage Damage from improper towing is not vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the COVERED Mider Die NEN VERICES Funeral ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 425 B If Your Engine Overheats 425 H24L Engine If Equipped 426 N Jacking And Tire Changing 427 O Jack Location esses ER RES beta EEG 428 ES pare Tire LOcanOm 333 sexu RE RS EER EES 428 O Preparations For Jacking 428 O Spare Tire Removal vie oto R eo ens 429 O Spare Tire Stowage O Jacking Instructions 00 O Road Tire Installation W jJump Starting PPM DUE D Preparations For Jump Start o Jump Starting Procedure N Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id la Shift Lever Override 445 O Front Wheel Drive Fwd 448 o With Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped 446 O Without The Ignition Key oos eer 449 Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle 446 B All Wheel Drive AWD 449 3 All Wheel Drive AWD sess 447 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the instrument panel switch bank above the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch
110. your exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve cation or oil change Replace as required hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn WARNINC e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain CAUTION carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and e The catalytic converter requires the use of un odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continued leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 CAUTION Continued e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine
111. your selection touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Doors amp Locks e Auto Unlock On Exit Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key to change this display When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter Io make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Remote Start Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sounds Horn With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your
112. 0 aug Tr EER 6 HAN ME IE DADE AI 280 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN O Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings 280 XO Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings 293 ll Video Entertainment System VES If Edadipped seas OS oars She he EU 307 ll iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 308 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls I Equip Ed u 99 Y red nenas HERO AE OER 308 B Right Hand Switch Functions 309 O Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio 8a ie lei PT m 309 O Left Hand Switch Functions For Media ie CD Opel HO ss wee oon seg pue px 309 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 310 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 310 B Climate Controls 0 0 00 00 08 311 O General Overview SS Es SS ee eee ol O Climate Control Functions 318 DO Automatic Temperature Control ATC 319 D Rear Automatic Temperature Control ARTE JDBOUDDed sudes v9 Ge reir 321 D Rear Blower Control 929 O Rear Temperature Control 324 Hi Rear Mode Control iss HER oo s 324 HOper otug ips s x o doe 3d 8855 DERE irte d 325 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES D Ms YY MOOOW T 040136140 Side Window Demist Outlet 6 Switch Bank 11 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Air Outlet 7 Uconnect Touch Hard
113. 0 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both
114. 33 place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received PSI mi RUN 055838856 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed NOTE 1 The compact spar
115. 343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 529 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of th
116. 4 Need directions want to send say the message you wish to send or say 5 I ll be there in XX minutes List There are 18 preset messages 6 Okay While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the VR button and saying the message you want to send After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 5 Call me 6 TI call you later 7 l m on my way 8 Thanks 9 TII be late 10 I will be number minutes late 11 See you in number minutes 12 Stuck in traffic p 14 15 16 17 18 Start without me Where are you Are you there yet I need directions I m lost See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The com
117. 506 Wheel THE serrare enrera ae I RES Steering Wheel Audio Controls 554 INDEX NEE Id Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls sis e sas erresis 308 OO voces cape vq ER ee que KOUD E 239 497 Blonde VENCE x uos noo Rn Re dome opos os Hae os 925 UK DESEE sis acu at a ecu eee dq dcs 443 DUE BRODE cueva N ESE atibus SS VET 227 DUD VISOEBXIGDSIOD 44 sar Een hea pees cee BE 105 ounglasses Ora E 4542 44 Ghat GER esr eeu ns 219 bunroor MAIDte Bae fay ese 9 9 eee poe ed vds 230 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 61 DUIDPCODITOL Valley e xs ce gona oe S aes oa 361 407 D BEepE ige Ol osa suis sand RUE I SR 461 DVStem Jenole SALIG is oa ot Eom ha ae kes RE 25 i unii meprise eiaeaen 259 juli PTT 501 Telescoping Steering Column 202 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 319 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 266 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 81 Theft Alarm Security Alarm sace e ees 17 Theft System Security Alarm disces 17 Tie Down Hooks Cargo ia era o s 247 Tt eers COME ea saa bas dode ER Rds 202 Time Delay Headlio se sa de EER BERE E and s 193 Tire and Loading Information Placard 367 Tire Identification Number TIN 365 Tie Mk iss Siete sepa wes vet PE 362 Tire Salety TRIOEDUSIOD asc are N RES Boe x 362 c Jv TIT 93 371 533 Aging Life of Tires uiuere Packed ER 378 AW bye iir e ear g HR ea se DRR e i 371 Calle 44464 32 3 528 YE
118. 536950 NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e Touch the Player soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bluetooth e Touch the Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of p
119. 60 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause 1 F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin amp Power Out let Console Rear damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited 2 F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel amp Power Warranty Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area 072736472 Power Outlet Fuses 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories sti
120. 8 Dn C EE EOE TEETE TETEE Day ume KUMINE uacua de US iN bea DEP AE 194 T1OOd ta EERS RATABAGASSG PESE 190 Dimmer Switch Headlight 195 196 Lead Free Gasoline sn 393 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 360 Leaks Plaid adea EX Gio y RUP SEE RD 93 EXO 2294324934595 X99 22 EP E 93 Life of Tires lee 378 EET RO ENS IE IE ENE 194 261 500 lene 4 as versie oe ey RED ee es EA i 41 lU T C 491 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 250 Hazard Warning Flasher sos 425 Rage lie gerrari AE EE ES 93 497 Heade ht SWIECI scs sacer OS eure senso ees 192 Lionit Replacement osse ROER EED es 499 Lieadli dd sesse ROER HEPR HAS SEER 192 499 Headlights On Reminder 4424854590244 194 Headlights On With Wipers 193 202 P EDO sos Ep MD MI 196 499 High Beam Indicator 261 High Beam Low Beam Select 196 Mu minated BID 6220255 gusce doy aee nt td 20 Instrument Cluster les 192 259 Intensity Contool 444 dedero rire s ea 196 IBIGHOL gage peed weg a pU cae 4 OP Ws 196 bie seda racc EE m EE EG 903 Lighis On Reminder sace view op deg 194 Low TUCL 2c eines VER GRA eee eee eas 272 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 259 Map Read atagenvig eau SHE ES Pd 198 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 197 Valk A rnm 499 Pass 6245 esa DEAR ka Ho ER KE Pub EER d 196 Regs sees ORDERS EN IRE FIRES 198 Real oe VEE 6634 san d PRED ES cess
121. AC 150 Watt maximum power rating is exceeded WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Power Inverter Operation The power inverter is turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 4 3 To turn the power inverter on or off perform the follow ing 1 Press the More hard key located next to the Uconnect Touch display 2 Press the Outlet soft key located on the Uconnect Touch display to turn the power inverter On or Off Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 4 and 8 4 Nav To enable or disable the power inverter perform the following 1 Press the Controls soft key UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 2 Press the Outlet soft key to turn the power inverter For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold On or Off ers located in the center armrest between the two seats CUPHOLDERS When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the back of the Head Restraint The Head Restraint can be adjusted to better position the cupholders There are two cupholders located in the center floor console for the front passengers Armrest Cupholders 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
122. Automatic 250 Ibs 113 kg with Trailer 2 500 Ibs 1 134 kg which in 8 Tow Prep 8 300 lbs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m ie T d persons amp Luggage Except ir AWD Package A 5 100 Ibs 113 kg 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m E UAR AE qu ME Except for AWD cludes 7 persons amp Luggage EE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information NOTE For All Wheel Drive AWD models carrying 5 to 7 persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR and therefore should not be attempted NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue we
123. Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will tum off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights parking lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
124. CLE NN Id e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable dan DVD players These items may interfere with the P 030907533 operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event Active Head Restraint Tilted of a collision and could result in serious injury or NOTE death e The head restraints should only be removed by quali Continued fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 WARNING Continued e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Second Row Seats The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re straints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press
125. Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 I of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end f
126. DERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and
127. Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Press the S button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore e Hold unhold e Mute unmute e Transfer the call to from the phone e Swap 2 active calls Join 2 active calls together 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the EVR button while in a call and say 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail pass word is s
128. E RT ee od O Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV LL 127 oO Driver s Power Seat If Equipped EVO PCIAUON uc ace 6434 ie a Cc dox de DRS 130 O Power Lumbar If Equipped HE hore Call Features aunke 4 739994 de 141 o Heated Seats If Equipped O Uconnect Phone Features ays awe ata a 146 O Manual Front Seat Adjustments H Advanced Phone Connectivity 150 a Recliner Adjustment xs vx ucc eo c9 D Things You Should Know About Your O Driver s Seat Height Adjustment Uconnect M PHONG e s Scu e seme tones ooo 93 151 HEP ue vov pu mar Nr ted x O General Information 2 2x cbe ex 159 o Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat W Voice Command sels 159 oe RE d D Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 159 E Head Restraints 224 4644 xe EE ee RED as O Uconnect Voice Commands 161 T or iu ii EM Voice hee asie RR BEER AE rid 163 060 40 Split Second Row Passenger Seats 167 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 050 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats With Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Model ss op SRSA ELS RS Gees 187 N To Open And Close The Hood 190 NE MEE RE EO EE HE eee eae 192 ae te lid ide WEB eee rires OE eu ve 192 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 192 3 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 193 O Headlight Time Delay 193 o Daytime Running Lights DRL
129. For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will auto matically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration
130. Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 The ECO indicator will illuminate in the EVIC display This ECO indicator will appear when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy N 72 Fuel Economy AVG 99 9 RESET F UTE LOW FUEL MPG 10 20 ami 041009379 Fuel Saver Mode On Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW
131. IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a erounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte erated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver s side of the vehicle The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK Interlock System BTSI that holds th
132. Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling eguipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following steps to replace the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box inward while gently pulling t
133. John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command Sve button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and say a comman
134. LECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is eguipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESC This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Control ESC and Trailer Sway Control TSC These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations
135. Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Moni tor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the OFF Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e Rain Sensing Touch the Rain Sensing soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Hill Start Assist If Eguipped Touch the Hill Start Assist soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in
136. MERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 0 ft 3 Ft 30 cm 1m 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle mu
137. MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 396 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering w
138. Mo PANOSHELD LT PAREL SEAT BELT aue Doel lr M us a VALE eme 1 TEW FAUL cingi DET MOST iLi Ld kd TEER oe dog vd da T AR a O0 SZ n oC ds LOW GLOW PG POWER verdrag p Wins OF Amd ABA SLiDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTEI MO ETER FOR UCCONNWEET HAZARD FOUS WHEEL ATEUENO FLU AWO WASHER RELEASE HANDLE Fi AAEM ATEN purTON sre Low C B E SRS X A um m k r AIC AIRBAG pve Ii 2 PUSH OFF BALTES TION THis GORE DOM AMT SI FLEMENTARF PABRSENDER Done LAS GOAVERTSLE CONVERTIELE HIE OVERS Am EL amp CTTID INDICATOR LHGHT DIL TEMP TEMPESATURS RESTRAINTSYETEM AlRAAG OFF TOP DOH TOP UF M MR FACE CUONTHTIOWER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title VIN Location 010807223
139. Moida ies lh Herma ok dy fae i sys pr say Li fo 3 hu enn pk ner crib uim GING cis Rand Cam ar mis ed pnmo valle audio hear al 14 defined message Is 4 Mas Raging comenandis nen woek A ng Liopnnnct sy suem is EL ER Tis AANGE Anci TA gyslem iig mz ps pro nae Longe TL Sr Esse Tesi n 5 nu can ear AB AAS 171 wan ony pene rumber SAPO Ey you hane phone i G TEM rar epiac A gilh ary Prisa nimpar aram Fa Tue senes Enlerr in contact T IF pour mios dinas nor magun phones iewn nait ex ra tog daweised pnr ST ihan thee name and aorta wi rum eke ede ateg Troad Min ponies rupi maan in lur ENGER phone type Note Available Volce Commands are shown In bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030539972 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the eguipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav The Uconnect Voice Command system al ti VR lows you to control your AM FM radio satel lite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel L
140. Motorhome Etc 421 334 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear belts CAUTION WARNING Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in the in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 335 Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the
141. OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time the vehicle is shifted out of PARK and remain ON unless the parking brake is applied Upon returning to the PARK position the DRLs will turn OFF DRLs will turn OFF when the ignition is switched OFF NOTE The daytime running lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch Fog Light Switch O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate when the low beam headlights or parking lights are on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam sel
142. OPERATING 351 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound the parking brake Always apply the parking to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle before attempting to move the vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front seriously or fatally injured Children should be wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away warned not to touch the parking brake brake from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake the vehicle A child could operate power windows before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load other controls or move the vehicle on the transmission locking mechanism may make it Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking before driving failure to do so can lead to brake brake should a
143. PARK 1 Remove the jack handle components 1 2 and 3 from storage and assemble them 5 Turn OFF the ignition 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear Ed wheel N l il l j iil i H j E il 7 E i jm i H E p TP 5 mr genl ah NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Spare Tire Removal 060640897 NOTE On seven passenger models fold the third row Lowering Raising Spare Tire passenger seats flat This will provide more space when NOTE Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at mechanism the end of component 3 This will lock these components together Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel 430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and seated on component 2 This will make it easier to rotate remove it from the center of the wheel the assembly when operating the winch mechanism x 2 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut located in the jack storage area Rotate the jack handle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the spare t
144. PERATING NN Id Anti Lock Brake Light The Anti Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS ies The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the ABS Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS system is required Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during t
145. Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care reguirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surface
146. R INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pa
147. RE ze is DE oueed THO Me NE El ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu in an emergency it should be replaced with the ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant e This vehicle has not been designed for use with antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR coolant antifreeze is not recommended Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or Adding Coolant equivalent TOME vehicle has been built with an improved engine e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before
148. RK 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the CAUTION Continued filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill e Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque Fluid Level Check 3 6L Engine converter shudder Using a transmission fluid The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer other than that recommended by the manufacturer serviced only will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information entering the transmission after checking or replen ishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Continued n addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine
149. RVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed systems may void your warranty and could result in civil maintenance schedule there are other components which penalties being assessed against you may require servicing or replacement in the future WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per motor vehicle Only do service work for which you form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 CAUTION
150. Refer to Ve hicle Loading and Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information If TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury 362 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use on
151. The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Touch System Set tings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Rear Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the headliner outlets The rear system temperature control is in the Uconnect Touch system located on the instrument panel E limate
152. Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedur
153. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System NN UN
154. V SE d BE SOR 380 Scu Lr 427 Compact Opare 444 42 92 caus ER PIS 9 5 General Information is ox o b oor Bo s 371 D eere EAE 374 Intlation Diesstres a sar BREER PR ttad Sy N INDEX 555 Jacks s te Se see eaget age T ERES EP 427 EMCO Wes sessie PS SO oe ES bend 378 Load AE 4 exist cones ose REN 367 368 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 383 Pressure Wartitip Light sper 9 ws 262 Onal Gradi ae mes RD poeedi RR s 533 Racial noe Etes c m 374 ReplaceWien aa eric RENE REED SEE 379 ROUGON stseeideqeee ee tage E a vus 382 si AC HERE RE E ee ce 362 971 7 MCI ER EED RE EES eae seas 363 PHOW THES sb TER ad bP RADE baa ee ee 382 Pate life C ee ma EE ht HAS RR 428 SPINS cs Rx ded WE pL RE oe 377 Ter TOWNE separa a EA eg S 416 Tread Wear Indicators 378 To Open LIOOU ss sed CP RR EE ER LOER DOER 190 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 413 TOWING 44 26 204944 ER EP ER 64492 SP eee 405 Behind a Motorhome 150 945024 Hise ews 421 Disabled Veli le quaes d date genet eau oa as 446 fn pee ase EET tbat an SE ET A11 Reede dk ens do 3 HEM AA qp HER ER 421 s Cr 411 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 421 DACON s SAAS ESE hoe bee CARS RP t 346 WACO OOI ous e vere ene tees Vue t E E 357 Trauer Sway Control TEE sarah dee temes 361 Tier TOWING 2 uda suec a 69 P oa vu PERE 405 Cooling System TIPE x us ciere REB 420 leg oad ia se ne BR MEDE Hea ee pe 410 Minimum Requirements ag ea
155. ached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold infla
156. ack should not be used to WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle operating the jack or changing the wheel should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Continued 428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id Jack Location Spare Tire Location The jack and jack handle are stowed underneath a cover The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the in the rear storage bin in the cargo area vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch mechanism Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 3 Set the parking brake WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429 4 Place the shift lever in
157. ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Bluetooth Uconnect Phone is Hands Free driven through your Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp e Button is used to recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will get into the phone mode and make calls show hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Sve Button t VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect P
158. aired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Disconnect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key chosen device move to the top of the list e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook 3 currently connected device Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipp
159. all continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touch screen e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your NOTE chances of successfully making a phone call as to that e The towing assistance call may also be initiated by for the mo
160. allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
161. allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command Sve button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the Seu or EVR buttons when the system is list
162. an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 528 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6
163. and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 355 These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING Continued WARNING e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip braking or steering efficiency beyond that af ment that may be susceptible to interference forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and caused by improperly installed or high output tires or the traction afforded radio transmitting equipment This interference The ABS cannot prevent accidents including can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 356 STARTING AND O
164. anel allows you to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the up position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 021936151 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry or by activating the power door lock switch located on either front door trim panel For further information on Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle NOTE The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or the door lock cylinder on the d
165. ar ihe randard Moicemai password only ihe Home number wil be sant H M yoru phot doses riot suppor plicasetsoe dosniai or call log devenit over BT Ian these commends will reum a response iisdeczabung hal lee contest does mal Eai an Ins phie U Berger and Towing azsislance are conacis ihe hove been pre iusdind in lbe phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call towing assistance will coll lhe carmesponding number sioned wilh ihnse contmecis 030538871 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect Text Messaging Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text Messages ina TLS Cs Del Se WET eo aer pusteng ree Loari Praag padan fre roere can OE KAT waar Wur ed rege Gos aero MEE Dar Set iL connect pura Earl huin Enter message fmm Message heel i riafnerd lisi prowde wil Be reed cut heer it by syslem of say bor ower Ing an ihe SLIS tn haar a 18 vehicle audi EDT defined massages system After ib message teki zs reed eu thee folowing commands While he message bext rs desptayed the following commands are avddable aller are available automatically gushing Use phones VR bulion Missa wilh entry Pama i ru din pag dos Arrie weh any ed ri jet slae oi yaaa and boot Tau can TE ja als sap ged the syrom wall nek pou wibsch phone rusmibier quu Enter THIS SERRE kom Number want te Sereruf aero trs Ben Jan Sart adenmnad iil prevede i ny associated wiih T You cnn nghe
166. asher is as sce PES PER E S e gus 250 Rearview MITOS ad a aede E RS ene ER RR 101 eetl OE ls Us ecwase sies E PRYS ves 179 Recline Rear Deals siese ex e POR Rc 184 187 Recorder Event Data SS SS 74 Recreational Towing ss Ee Rn RR n 421 Retormulated Gasoline ua a cs sass an dw ea eee ed 393 ke roei aves ets es ch eons TET 466 Release Hood 0 00 00 0c eee eee eee 190 Reminder Lems OR 2s201 446440 h4 WED es 194 Reminder Seat Belt 0 000 58 Remote Control Plate OVGlCI nas age EER eee ee PA EUR 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 308 Remote Starting SVSICML s ses fura oad os ER oo ba 25 Replacement BulDS 25337 444 2544 er PRE BE S 497 Replacement KEYS souse X78 OPERA DEE ORES in 16 Replacement Parts sues es ions emen timis 457 Replacement DS uu waive are DE ES Vo vx bag 379 Reporting Safety Defects 4 asia 465 Be ROES 530 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 262 275 Restraint Head 2 65444 2r EERS BERE S 175 Restraints Child eren 75 Restraints Occupant sssri te be ERA iiad itip 42 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 248 Reverse Picts sa ERA EE VS HASE Gs een cane 501 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 52552 443 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 0 259 Rotation Tires 552 INDEX NEE Id Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 4225244554444 RY 91 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 4 lt 4 aee 93 Daiety Defects Repor
167. at N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to 206
168. at belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 CAUTION eo FOS Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the driver s seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to de crease the lumbar support Pushing upward or down Power Lumbar Switch ward on the switch will raise or lower the position of the Heated Seats If Equipped support On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The heated seats are operated using the Uconnect Touch System 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 4 3 Touch the CLIMATE hard key located on the left side of the Uconnect Touch display to enter the climate con trol screen aj once to select HI level heating Touch the soft
169. ating Oil Change Required with a single chime 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC White Telltale Lights e Electronic Speed Control SET This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell This light will turn on when the electronic tales These telltales include O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under See T UMS standing The Features Of Your Vehicle The shift lever status P R N D L 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights indicate the Autostick feature has been engaged and This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell the gear selected is displayed For further information on tales These telltales include TM u JJ AutostickTM refer to Starting And Operating e Low Fuel Light e Electronic Speed Control ON When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal This light will turn on when the electronic 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until O speed control is ON For further information fuel is added refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under e Loose Gascap Indicator If the vehicle diagnostic system determines A that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button standing The Featur
170. attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat remov ing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them In addition never leave unattended children in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Chi
171. ause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 531 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you
172. ave any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 WARNING POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure
173. avel 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the seatback forward Then in one fluid motion the seat cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its tracks 030936690 Tip n Slide Seat NOTE A hand grip is molded into the front of each quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry and exit from the third row passenger seats N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this posi tion as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury To Unfold And Move The Second Row Passenger Seat Rearward 1 Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until it locks in place 2 Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place 3 Adjust the seat track position as desired Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury 50 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats With Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models To provide additional storage area ea
174. bile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone touch The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep Working With Automated Systems say Iowing Assistance This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When ca
175. call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Also you can press the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the End soft key or the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new activ
176. calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the amp button to toggle between the active and held phone call Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial Hi 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation C
177. ce is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left except as noted below AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is moved out of the AutoStick position General Information You can launch the vehicle from a stop in any gear except top gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift into top gear at too low of a vehicle speed If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transmission control logic will automatically
178. center of the instru ment panel There are also hard keys located below the Uconnect Touch screen 044336084 1 Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Climate Hard Key 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Controls Hard Keys Automatic Temperature Controls Hard Keys Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen slimate OFF Driver Pass WOW G Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Manual Temperature Controls Soft Keys 045641067 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft Keys Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id If equipped with ATC performing this function will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation if equipped with ATC The speeds can be selected using either hard heys or soft keys as f
179. ch third row pas senger seatback can be folded flat This allows for ex tended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if needed NOTE Prior to folding the third row passenger seat back make sure the second row passenger seatback is not in a reclined position This will allow the seatback to fold easily 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Fold The Seatback Pull the latch release loop located at the top of the seatback upward push the seatback forward slightly and release the release loop Then continue to push the seatback forward The head restraints will fold automati cally as the seatback moves forward Seatback Release To Unfold The Seatback Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it toward you to raise the seatback Continue to raise the seatback until it locks in place Raise the head restraint to lock it in place Assist Strap N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING Continued The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position To do so pull the latch release loop located at the top of the seatback upward allow the seatback to recline and release the release loop WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into e Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passe
180. change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat po sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle driver 1 and driver 2 last mode settings and presets To make your selection touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 e Passive Entry Keyless Enter N Go Touch the Passive Entry soft key to change this display This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Heated Seats e Auto Heated Seats Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Engine Off Options e Headlight Off Delay T
181. ck is in the unlocked position Child Protection Door Lock Location N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision 1 l th door Remember that the rear doors can only be opened ea 2 from the outside when the Child Protection locks are 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the engaged Failure to follow this warning may result in child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position serious injury or death Y NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle Child Protection Door Lock Function 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons
182. ckwise to lock it in place 6 Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite end of the lens into the housing making sure it locks in the housing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 FLUID CAPACITIES U Metric Fuel Approximate Front Wheel Drive FWD Models 77 6 Liters All Wheel Drive Models 79 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 26 Liters 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified 5 6 Liters Cooling System 2 4L Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System MOPAR 7 9 Quarts 7 5 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 4L Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System MOPAR 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 6L Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System MOPAR 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 6L Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System MOPAR 12 Quarts 11 4 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part EE Cacia MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy 5 brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oi
183. clockwise to increase the tempera ture The rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect Touch system When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect Touch system the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the tem perature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored Rear Mode Control Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu pants Headliner Mode gt Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode exe J Air comes from the floor outlets Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to
184. coming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone amp e button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent
185. ct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 369 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For t
186. ction of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the Brake Warning Light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level
187. ctronic Brake Control System 354 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 354 O Brake Assist System BAS 356 H Traction Control System TCS 2 9 3 6 omm 357 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 357 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 358 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 360 O Trailer Sway Control TSC 2244445944544 361 W Tire Safety Information 362 Er lite Mat kes sees ane PR paio ro e ede os 362 D Tire Identification Number TIN 365 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 366 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 367 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 W Tires General Information 371 Olie Pressure vari reati dekaan 371 O Tire Inflation Pressures 372 O Radial Ply lites ve sue 4 3 en oye os 374 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped 374 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 375 O Full Size Spare If Eguipped sees uy vs 376 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 376 EL Dre END SE See EES RE EE ge SE 377 O Tread Wear Indicators 378 Ellie He pane tia eat 29 493 23 22323 378 E Replacement TIES sa soper ot dete de ee 379 W Tire Chains RAAR SEE EE N bene ees 380 W Snow Tires sien goog HN hes bees enn Zt 382 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 382 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS
188. cturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi
189. d 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM CAUTION Continued WARNING e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CA
190. d Sale vider die BR Eq E EE e 346 Hazard Warning Flasher i e si scent Rotes 425 Head Kestainits sie soe lt i toga aes eee Soe 175 Headlights PULOMANG sac heatus 425065 PEU SUP ee E 192 Bulb Replacement 2 55 445626444820 4 d des E 499 les ie oes DAE eye nae AU eae OR ED ee 490 p Pr 193 Fen Beam gaa tt ee ius Va P VR eee EE 499 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 196 Lights On Reminder ss ees esd iem es 194 On With Wipers 4 2605 GR RE odes ones 193 202 Passe da oe dd bee rAE SLAE SERE ORE 196 GWC 212 4552 8 2 329995 9 VE SR REK DRR S 192 Mme Delay 4 42 2 kong ER 6 ERE ede de 193 Heated MiO 2392 22 98 ie oe tena ERO RD eee 104 Heid Peale PPP 169 N INDEX 545 Heater Engine Bleek soas EE ER RADE Ss 338 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 196 Hitches Trailer TOWING sus ox ORE oe 9 DR DE 410 Holder COM 25 24 65 Ai Coe ESEL EI aS ee 239 HOG CUD 444 3 ERA AR ee wane eee es awe rs 237 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 220 Hood Release eee 190 Ignition CY Ged Sap twes aca teats ee oe oe Hey tae 12 kla ee ed ENUY saeveaecasaceeeeehoe dans 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key usce eec sies edo aS RS 19 Infant Restraint si ezuones ER E EEG E ES 75 76 Information Center Vehicle aaaea 268 Inside Rearview Mirror een 101 Instrument Cluster sies eens De ER EE RR Gc RES 259 Instrument Panel and Controls aaa 297 Instrument Panel Cover een 489 Instrume
191. d Wan E 46 64 oe Ge bak Acide ae iei 425 WO id caters eens tees e ap d 93 195 261 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Es Rance she 2 63 9 3 9 agi 3 QE x 62b es 400 PRC OU P 400 Fuel Requirements lt s ouer a dde Es dete 397 399 Maintenance SS SS ee ee ee eee 401 Replacement Paris Soa user dw ERROR ER RU 401 DUN P 400 Hooded Engine DATUNG se oce uu sae eed Oa DERE 337 Floor Console ii EER 444 404 4445448004 239 Huid dioi vic rensa EE ET EE IE 505 Lnd Cake 226625 4uneee 2 222403 54232 2 94 93 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 483 484 oe 22450426044 s Pong ene eee IG 480 507 Coone leid ora cies REED HR ES 474 od OM genaeeagiee eee ER OE 459 N INDEX 543 Powar GEOIDO aa REEDE SERE EO 349 507 Fluid Brake 4 4264 46 666240444444 DEd Y RES 507 SEDI OI RR ARE AT OAR KS EES EES 506 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 506 Fop Light meiice soda oie oe tak RARR AD HE 500 POO MIMS 4459 49 5 eneeeaceranseee 194 261 500 Folding Kear seal si reres ROER ID RSG a 4 180 187 Preemie A Stuck Vehicle 24 ideas o er ena 443 Es AA NE NE oe OO ET NS EN 393 AUNE AE Goa RE EE aine Pa 401 Addis 94 a6 rane emer DY dice e 9 d ME DU ara 395 Cleat AI ss v och dE PARRA ES Ps PES 393 Ro RAATS EE EER 276 Ethanol 264066266464 SES EE 5339 304 Filler Cap Gas Cap saceanecep uasai 266 401 Filler Door Gas Cap 3 vaa SERE n d ee DE 266 Gasoline s RR PSOE Oh DREK RE E DRS N 393 c EA OO HT TE ETES 266 Lift e
192. d for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and
193. d or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the Seu or EVR buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the amp or EvR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further informa tion Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 You can do either of the following a Press the Settings hard key Page down to the Phone Bluetooth soft key press it and you will see the Paired Phones screen If there are no paired phones you will see lt Empty gt as the first device name b Press the MORE hard key then press the Phone soft key and you will go to the Uconnect Phone main screen Press the Settings soft key If there are no phones currently paired a pop up will
194. d protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags Supple mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle f
195. ded cargo space When the side of the seat Raise the lever to raise the seat Lowerthe seat is folded flat it is an extension of the load floor lever to lower the seat The total seat travel is approxi surface allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up mately 2 15 in 55 mm to the instrument panel The fold flat seatback also has a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in WARNING motion Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 030936688 Fold Flat Seat Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Re
196. dio when the park ing lights or headlights are on Dimmer Controls 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Refer to Overhead Console in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031536316 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Intermittent Wiper System There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind between cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph shield wiper washer control lever to one of the first five 16 km h At speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h the detents to select the desired delay interval delay varies from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles NOTE The w
197. dow defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 mirror cover upward The light will tum on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light 030436230 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped This feature allows for additional flexibility in position ing the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it Uconnect Phone Uconnect Touch 4 3 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls Searching
198. dows The window controls will operate when the ignition is in the ON RUN or ACC position NOTE For vehicles eguipped with the Uconnect Touch the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob Occupants particularly unattended children can be come entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Auto Down Feature To close the window part way pull the window switch The driver s power window switch has an Auto down up to the first detent and release it when you want the feature Press the window switch past the first detent window to stop release and the window will go down automatically NOTE 2 To open the window part way press the window switch e If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto to the first detent and release it when you want the closure it will reverse direction and then go back window to stop down Remove the obstacle and use the window To stop the window from going all the way down during switch again to close the window the Auto down operation pull up on the
199. draulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking e Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Refer to Anti Lock Brake System ABS under Elec possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting tronic Brake Control System in this section for more or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor information mally high brake temperatures excessive lining WARNING wear and possible brake damage You would not ci N B inis LP E Wii es The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics poe veels van Die IAE HUS from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking Dettormance OF SENIE taut MADE DIe ie cannot prevent collisions including those resulting may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to con trol You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately from excessive speed in turns driving on very slip pery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id E
200. e headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e l ress LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 9 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Secu
201. e severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 2 4L 453 W Maintenance Procedures 458 N Engine Compartment 3 6L 454 EES O PC 459 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 455 O Engine Oil EIGE cercas ios sor a Ea o e 462 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 455 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter lt 2 lt oreet s 462 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance E Maintenance Free Battery issues tee RR GE tDI si wag RIA uas HER eR ee Ede ad 456 HA GESE T E EEN B Replacement Parts ES ES Se 457 3 A C Air Filter If Equipped 466 W Dealer Service us va durae dd 44554524086 457 3 Body Lubrication seen A68 E Wiper Blades 215 vy uta SE erri in 03 468 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id H Adding Washer Fluid o Exhaust System D Cooling System O Brake System D Automatic Transmission 482 D Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD Models ODD Cs Ee DIESE ERAS LM SE DE 485 D Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD Models Ou A RE RE HE 485 D Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion 26444082665 ma deb SS He ra dcs WR Y 486 O Cleaning The Cupholders 491 RE MS N HT EE ARE IE NG 491 E Interior Fuses is so dace 1 iub bee hoes has 491 O Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center
202. e Equipped 15 Amp Climate Control Blue Instrument Panel Cavity Description Cavity Description If Equip Ned 10 Amp _ Tire Pressure Module Red 10 Amp _ Spare Red 20 Amp Trailer Tow If Yellow Equipped F132 Blue F133 10 Amp Audio Amplifier 10 Amp Passenger Assistance Red F131 Red P Hands Free System 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center 4 Cartridge Mini m The power distribution center is located in the engine Cavity pice Pace Description ea F101 60 Amp Interior Power Distri Yellow bution Center Rail F102 60 Amp Interior Power Distri Yellow bution Center Rail 60 Amp Interior Power Distri bution Center Rail Interior Power Distri bution Center Rail Ignition Run Rela 60 Amp 60 Am Interior Power Distri F106 Sa kd bution Center Rail BEP Run Accessory Relavs j 072710833 Climate Control Sys tem Blower Power Locks F139 40 Amp Green 30 Amp F140 Pink MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 ET ome F141 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys F149 30 Amp Starter Solenoid Green tem Pink F142 40 Amp Glow Plugs If F150 25 Amp Powertrain Control Green Equipped Natural Modules F143 40 Amp Exterior Lights 1 F151 30 Amp Headlamp Washer Green Pink Motor If Equipped F144 40 Amp Exterior Lights 2 F152 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater If Green Natural Equipped F153 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow F156 10 Amp Brake Electronic Sta Red bility Control M
203. e Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 057003766 75 X O O O A bo od o 7 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes NS TA TING AND OPERATING 419 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range use the Autostick feature to select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the transmis sion fluid and automatic transmission filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing The six speed transmission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked See your authorized dealer for assistance Electronic Speed Control If Equipped
204. e and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans
205. e call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your operational you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to that follows for the mobile phone directly e Press the S button to begin WARNING e After the Listening prompt and the following
206. e jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id CAUTION CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be transmission overheating and failure Allow the en tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free
207. e liftgate will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To Enter The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the button underneath the left side of the accent bar which is located on the liftgate below the glass to lock or unlock the vehicle 022236570 Liftgate Unlock Lock Button Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in t
208. e number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE All of the above operations except Redial canbe Call Controls done with 1 call or less active The touch screen allows you to control the following call Dial By Saying A Number features e Press the S button to begin e Answer e End e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e Ignore e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number e Hold unhold 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone e Press the amp button to begin owap 2 active calls e After the Listening prompt and the following beep f e Join 2 active calls together say
209. e on the Uconnect Touch display Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Heated Seats Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup through hard keys and soft keys NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time SCREEN OFF 044336083 1 Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings Hard Key Press the Settings hard key to access the Settings screen use the Page Up Down soft keys to scroll through the following settings Touch the desired setting soft key to change the setting using the description shown on the following pages for each setting Settings Mc Display Clock Please select a setting Safety Assistance Exit Lights Co Uconnect Touch 4 3 Soft Keys UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Display e Brightness Touch the Brightness soft key to change this display When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Mode Touch the Mode soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings
210. e possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together x 022636143 Removing Slack From Belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it c
211. e required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 408 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information 057007215 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 409 057007214 057007212 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 410 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory eguipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg
212. e shift lever in the or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake position OFF position with Keyless Enter N Go To pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward move the shift lever out of the PARK position the or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START and hit someone or something Only shift into position engine running or not and the brake pedal gear when the engine is idling normally and when must be pressed your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 5 Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK and apply the parking brake Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Four Speed Or Six Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 051010805 Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by
213. e steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do Power Steering Fluid Check not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid service interval is not required The fluid should only be 350 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage uum Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND
214. e tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on and a 392 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure
215. e vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 530 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to c
216. e wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn OFF WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other park position If the windshield wiper control is turned OFE and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of Windshield Washers the windshield during freezing weather warm the To use the windshield washer push the washer knob windshield with the defroster before and during located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to windshield washer use the second detent Mist Feature Push the washer knob located on the end of the multi function lever inward to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Headlights With Wipers
217. ear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 56 000 miles 91 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 517 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 72 000 miles 117 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 80 000 m
218. eatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana HB AR RE bag which may cause severe or dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web fatal injury to the infant site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s second row passenger seats are equipped with the child restraint anchor system
219. ection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the
220. ection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 031536316 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released Interior Lights The interior lights come
221. ed and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text e Touch the Delete Device soft key names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite website for supported phones e Touch the Settings soft key e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key As e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Automatic download and update if supported begins e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans start the vehicle ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down phone connection loaded and updated every time a phone is connected Managing Your Favorite Phonebook to the Uconnect Phone There are three ways you can add an entry to your F ite Ph l e Depending on the maximum number of entries down avorite Phonebook
222. ee of brake application 13 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will tum on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 14 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 15 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 16 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 18 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the n
223. eeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 5 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 6 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 7 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 8 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer The
224. een will change to change to change to T I Link 2 ar gc l 4 Travel Link Travel Link NFL lisa Sports Favorites Headlines Listings i Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Home Fuel Prices Weather Motes 1 You can yeploce NFL with any league shown on the sports league screen For example you can say Show MLB headlines or Show PGA Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536937 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when nat on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Navigation EE Route Navigation Home listening to Guidance screen will shown your voice nti on the touch Prompt is EE Hote Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030536939 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 SEATS Driver s Power Seat If Equipped Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat vehicle near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat m WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these area
225. ement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires eguiva lent to the originals in size guality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 380 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle c
226. en ee D 12 Beatrice Adams Listen Y 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen 10 Lin Ford Listen bj 9 Jay Kay Listen Once a message is received and viewed or listened to you will have the following options Read Messages e Send a Reply If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message e Call e Forward 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Send Messages Using Soft Keys 68 o FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou 72 You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send Messaging gt New Messag x a new message e Touch the Phone soft key Now 2 No 3 Call me Message e Touch the messaging soft key then New Message 4 Need directions e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person 5 I ll be there in XX minutes you wish to send the message to 6 Okay e If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent e Press Send or Cancel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Send Messages Using Voice Commands 68 a FM 917 10 10 NW 54 ou e Press the Se button Messaging gt 1 Yes e After the Listening prompt and the following beep nu TIT 2 No say Send message to John Smith mobile 3 Call me e After the system prompts you for what message you
227. engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC will display ACC e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC will display ON RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC will display OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 If Engine Fails To Start Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the
228. ening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or EvR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 TR FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou EZEN phone When prompted on the phone enter the name lea ENE EEN T OR and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from No phone connected the Uconnect Phone main screen Would you like to pair a phone e Touch the Add Device soft key 3 e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen 030536949 e See Step 4 to complete the process 3 Select Yes to begin t
229. er cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location 368 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Corre
230. er items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not 406 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or te
231. es Of Your Vehicle to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator gues This light will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or i more doors may be ajar UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 e Oil Pressure Warning Light que This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the 274 UNDERSTANDING YOU
232. es must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with an electric defroster Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm
233. ety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the climate control is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify
234. event scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level 2 4L Engine the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle 3 6L Engine the level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as
235. ey Programming os 404 4 EE RD AAS Ra 17 Sentry Key Replacement 222 9222 9 ns 16 N INDEX 553 DOLI UIEO A SSISEMIEE ii nteesesaun RR AS XU os 527 Specifications Service Contract aos Pag ERA DRR TEE e 529 Fuel Gasoline sss 506 Service Engine Soon Light p METTI 460 506 Malfunction Indicator ES SS 259 Speed Control Cruise Control 203 Pervice Manie uos idee ita ERROR ADA od OPCJE jx teu gene EEN DEd HA ak ao 266 onu Lever Ovens seris 046 45 4 DNE RA RE od AE EE EE TEE p NAR d 25 334 Shifting Automatic Transmission 334 Automatic Transaxle soot des OR PRED ewes 338 Cold Weather ss aues dos dede dca ie eas A de 5 336 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage Jl baie Fails OD sevacedeesGyunses a 337 olodlderbell e es aiea pe anaa a d HEDE E 46 Msi rr 25 stele ide RATE ET EE TE EE 70 Saune and OUCH is cw a ve bbws BE RE 334 Side View Mirror Adjustment 102 Slate Procedures ages vache eee HER pees 334 Sais TUE uasa e deer eae ees 93 195 261 501 Steering Slippery Surfaces Driving On 345 Column Controls au sos suu d v3 RAAR Au EE 195 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 380 Column Lock ex corr act ddHRO3 RR d RP E TERES 202 Snow DOS ons bc kw Ge EE SEE RU S GER AC 382 EON ASE ELE eee es bee HA EE 348 349 pare PB 22299995 239 9 9 PAGE PEE S 375 376 428 Jit Colutmfb uas toti eR XR PI dC Pans 202 park Files siste RE ee eee IESU PEST DU
236. f the front seats inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label 022637728 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side 022607261 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both
237. f these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder v2 i 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder mo 072607742 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid rese
238. fact that they 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the have moved forward as shown in step three of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism resetting procedure f 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 022607497 022607757 1 Downward Movement 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 2 Rearward Movement 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 gt P AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until
239. feting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE The delay time if programmable using the Uconnect Touch system Refer to Uconnect Touch System in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS A 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the center console below the radio The power outlet has power available
240. fore raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued 432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on jack locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Instructions for this vehicle Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 060641614 Jacking Locations Jack Warning Label N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433 1 Remove the spare tire jack and jack handle from stowage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the wheel nuts counter clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Front Jacking Location 434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id
241. ft key to turn the ECO message located in the instrument cluster display on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Clock e Set Time Touch the Set Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may select the time display settings To make your selection touch the Set Time soft key adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 soft keys select AM or PM select 12 hr or 24 hr Then touch the arrow back soft key when all selections are complete e Show Time Status Touch the Show Time Status soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sync Time Touch the Sync Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may have the radio set the time automatically To change the Sync Time setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Safety Assistance e Front Collision Warning If Equipped Touch the Front Collision Warning soft key to change this display The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn yo
242. g excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any o
243. ge you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being use
244. ge of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the en TOUR ee LL ES ES COE left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged Bep pans be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 402 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap
245. ging antenna door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the NOT the button normally used to open and close the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so door proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 1 Garage Door Opener At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate _2 Training Button the Learn or Training button 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete
246. git Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized opera tion While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id switches for door locks are disabled If something trig gers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse th
247. gnature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 521 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 522 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular
248. gs SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs or a cinching latch plate or both which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear
249. gs screen ECCT Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the currently connected device At the Options pop up screen touch the Make Favor ite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able
250. h a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Sliding Armrest 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If NOTE Make sure that objects inside the bin do not Eduipped interfere with the latch before closing the seat Push the The seat latch release loop is located in the center of the seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback latches to the base Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then forward to open the seat to the detent position WARNING Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passen gers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage Bin This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when the seatback armrest is down Be sure to remove all items from this bin before raising the seatback armrest Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment Second Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers If Equipped A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located on the back of the drivers seatback
251. has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degr
252. have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 060536917 Preparations For Jump Start Remote Battery Posts The battery in your vehicle is located between the left 1 Remote Positive Post Covered With Protective Cap front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash _2 Remote Negative Post shield To allow jump starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 WARNING e Take care t
253. he stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for more information Electronic Ro
254. he EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The following Fuel Economy func tions will display in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Average
255. he Mode control to Mix or Defrost pille as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 045636890 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures ss ss 334 D Automatic Transmission 334 HKevless Enter NO so ss eee Sse ar OE bo Ses 995 O Normal Staring 2358 KAREE SR BES 335 D Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F Or 29 C i usq ER TREE 336 oO If Engine Fails To Start 5 29x Fax ees 397 BL ATIS AOE sos see amp 2E eee eee ER 337 N Engine Block Heater If Equipped 338 Bl Automatic Transmission oO Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System D Four Speed Or Six Speed Automatic TEANSMMNGSION soge s HR BE RC Dor ea Hoor Kies os aucun ese eee eee bee ese N AutoStick If Equipped HOPEAN serrer nae oe eee ne bee a O General Information N All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 330 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 345 mP eeoloid EN iow acest SERE ER DY PP ES RO 345 VIACOM oes RE GROETE OOR te eu N DS 346 N Driving Through Water 346 O Plowing Rising Water se bes ee aka s 346 O Shallow Standing Water 347 Mi Power Steering 6 348 O Power Steering Fluid Check esee 349 aM Parking Brake se cate uem vA beds pi N es 350 Mi Brake System 000000 352 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 353 N Ele
256. he following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 370 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib e Occupant 3 160 Ibs ts x 100 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 tbs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult over heating and in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your veh
257. he glove box door outward until both tabs clear the door opening in the instrument panel N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 i 81fAd21d Glove Box Removal A C Air Filter Replacement 3 Pivot the glove box downward 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of i n l the housing 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter E cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Reinstall the glove box door Make sure that the hinges are seated fully as you raise the door Otherwise the door latch will not align properly Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricatin
258. he pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 68 of FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wo 72 Bluetooth pairing in progress Please wait 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the More soft key to begin e Touch the Settings soft key e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Bluetooth pairing successful Droid Incredible Make this phone the favorite 030
259. he vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on the outside of the handles 021834092 Outside Door Handle Lock Button With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and the liftgate NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect Touch System the key protection described in Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in Vehicle remains active functional e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s i nterior door panel 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all of the door windows 021936150 Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door win
260. he winch mechanism click three times It cannot be over tightened 13 Stow the jack handle and jack 14 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Adjust the tire pressure as required NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 Road Tire Installation is i Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 2 Valve Notch 5 Mounting Stud has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may 3 Wheel Lug Nut result in personal injury 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to fol
261. hicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake gt pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in the in the ACC or RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle D I xx Uu Cem AN 021836147 Power Door Lock Switch Location Power Door Locks The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To liftgate Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the vehicle and any front door is open the N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The Au
262. hone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so eguipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked
263. hone call after pushing the connect voice command bulton insert talking head icon on the steering wheel Please nate the call will be mubed while ihe VR session is active 8 Send dial tones for automanted systems i available while a call is active 7 Storng Dial tones in contact names is possible but only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voicemail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over BT than these commands will retam a response mdicaling thal the contact does not exist in the phonebook 9 Emergency and Towing assistance ame contacts the have been pre loaded in the phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call towing assistance will call the comesponding number stoned woth those contacts Note Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined in the green shaded boxes 030538628 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the eguipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interfe
264. hts will also turn on when the storage for sunglasses an interior observation mirror and UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed The an optional power sunroof switch courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press the lens a second time to turn each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 Courtesy Reading Light Sunglass Storage Compartment Sunglasses Storage Interior Observation Mirror To access the storage compartment press on the raised The convex interior observation mirror provides the bars on the compartment door in the center of the console driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to and release and the door will swing downward conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passen ger seats To use the interior observation mirror press on the raised bars on the compartment door and release the 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M door will swing downward then raise the door until itis Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped almost closed and release The door will latch in position Refer to Power Sunroof in Understanding the Fea to use the interior observation mirror tures of Your Vehicle for further information GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink rep
265. iagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the d
266. ible vehicle system performance may be e Even though the system is designed for users speaking compromised with the convertible top down in North American English French and Spanish ac Far End Audio Performance cents the system may not always work for some wem e Audio quality is maximized under e When navigating through an automated system such quet as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of low to medium blower setting speaking the digit string make sure to say Send e low to medium vehicle speed e Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the e low road noise vehicle is not in motion is recommended e smooth road surface e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar e dry weather conditions and e fully closed windows e operation from the driver s seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness Bluetooth Communication Link to a large degree rely on the phone and network and Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the not the Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume OFF ON Your cellular phone is recommended to remain l in Bluetooth ON mode 3 e In a convertible vehicle
267. icle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued 372 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting f
268. if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion NS TA TING AND OPERATING 395 To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
269. if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 516 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J _1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 64 000 miles 104 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular w
270. ight 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cargo Management System Seven Passenger System Features Five Passenger System Features e A large built in storage bin with a hinged hardcover located in the floor behind the third row passenger e A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built in PM storage bin A tri fold door built into the load floor that allows easy access to items in the built in storage bin 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle for further information Cargo tie downs A retractable cargo area cover if equipped 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle for further information 50 50 split third row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle for further information An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in Understanding The Features of Your Ve hicle for further information
271. ight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 414 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Contin
272. iles 130 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 518 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter JJ Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness
273. ime to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a CAUTION considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze result in engine damage and may decrease corro Gu scc Of Coolant sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool O
274. ing this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system 3 requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types
275. ink NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e didn t understand e didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When us
276. ions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into sec ond gear third gear for six speed automatic The trans mission remains in second gear third gear for six speed automatic despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 343 In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Enter N Go 4 Restart the engine 5 Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic eguipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer servi
277. ions to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have
278. iper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Front Wiper Control 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Operation NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON position CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than OFF Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion In cold weather always turn OFF the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning OFF the engine If the wiper switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 031536317 Front Wiper Control Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 CAUTION Continued If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in e Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the the OFF position th
279. ipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function wil
280. ire out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch Spare Tire Retainer 3 Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and raise it upright so the tire s tread is on the ground NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431 Spare Tire Stowage NOTE Refer to Spare Tire Removal for information on assembling the winch tools 1 Place the spare tire near to the winch cable Hold the spare upright so that the tire s tread is on the ground and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing away from the rear of the vehicle 2 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop it through the center of the wheel Then place the spare tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle 3 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut Rotate the jack handle assembly clockwise to raise the spare tire into the storage area Continue to rotate the jack handle assembly until you hear the winch mecha nism click three times It cannot be over tightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely in place Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible be
281. ired for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg A STARTING AND OPERATING 417 CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision Continued WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 418 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations OTTO O70 O Q 79 Md Four Pin Connector Femal
282. is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C 6 system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN
283. isted in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil cha
284. ith the emissions con overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine IF EQUIPPED running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into E 85 General Information the vehicle The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve
285. ivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 533 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variatio
286. jury or damage to objects position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury keep your head arms and objects out of the folding path of the seatback 4 Gently guide the seatback into the folded position Forward And Rearward Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward Release the lever once the seat is in the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Manual Seat Adjustment 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Recliner Adjustment The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seatback lean back lift the lever position the seatback as desired and then release the lever To return the seatback to its normal up
287. key a second time to select LO level heating Touch the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 3 and 8 3 Nav Touch the Controls soft key located on the Uconnect Touch display Touch the Driver or Pass seat soft key located on the Uconnect Touch display 10 10 NW 54 ou 4 1130 030939992 Controls Soft Key Touch the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Touch the soft key a second time to select LO level heat ing Touch the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 FM 91 7 54 out system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes ase Hi e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise Heated Seats Soft Key care when using the seat heater It may cause burns NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will Co
288. l meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 4L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Power Transfer Unit PTU MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent Rear Drive Assembly RDA MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 510 O Required Maintenance Intervals 512 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 510 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Ed MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services l
289. l be defaulted To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror reverse Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to 3 collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 030436289 Power Mirrors Power Mirror Switches The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door Models Without Express Window Feature trim panel Press the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing 104 UNDERSTANDING THE
290. l cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger and rear temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger and rear temperature setting at the same time NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode gt Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defros
291. laces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels Observation Mirror NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the HomeLink Buttons Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu mation or assistance rity Alarm is active Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 81cb44fe 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before
292. laway Tonneau Cover sis ses dae Ed ws 248 Tri Fold Load Floor 2s ui eee NR oh ee er 246 COreo Tie DOWWE 19 que che ben KOR EE a aci 247 Cellular PHONG s nso so on eae daha one ee eee 3 310 CCErancadon Lapel 2344 25 8 442 9 Sure deg b ispi 403 Chains Tire eee 380 Changing A Flat TH vance veg de as Gye a oa EE 427 Chare Tie SIZING sos oon cong KOOS ceeds 363 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 259 456 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 89 Checks dil 4 sau x E yat oe tetas 84 C eee 89 Cll Boosiet Ocal Pr ie Child Restraint 4243939 SEKERES ER 75 77 79 83 85 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 81 83 Child SMOD books ER ER LESER RE ao 4 91 Clean Air Gasoline oes se poe KAREE R EP BANE 393 N INDEX 539 Cleaning dIE OS ae es EER doe a 488 Windshield Wiper Blades 468 Climate Control uox aac odor seo Pha ew ee ee ee eS 311 Com LIOKIBE 222 408 eie Cea qud i2 rus us 239 Cold Weather Operation 4 sacs gore esos Ren 336 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 310 Compact opare DIS ss scr se siie PAPA Gehan es 375 Computer d Travel ueovseeuane 93532 VER 278 Connector is SS OE NE N SR FEE ES 308 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 308 CODON Ue sue Scene a8 05 3 9 geese PER ARE 2 6 Console Floor 25523 9e REX oboe x9 d 3 des 3 239 Console Overhead eren 218 Contract Service dc 2c hus a 65 54 X39 GB es 529 Coolant Pressure Cap Radia
293. ld Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary NOTE When installing a child restrain
294. led a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 12 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder
295. ll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of
296. ll plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug POWER INVERTER IF EGUIPPED Your vehicle may be eguipped with a 115 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power outlet located on the back of the center console This outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as MM 025007607 Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as Power Inverter will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt
297. lling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the EvR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 t you can press the amp vR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the VR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e Pauses wait or other characters that are
298. llowing condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed truck towing dolly or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised CAUTION Towing faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with front wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449 Without The lgnition Key Front Wheel Drive FWD Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available wheel lift towing equipment may be used Rear towing with the front wheels on the ground is not allowed as transmission damage will occur If rear towing is the only alternative the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle All Wheel Drive AWD The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can caus
299. llowing the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e A diagonal 9 in 22 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center overhead console The screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing e The LCD Screen swings down from the console to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display VES M with Rear HVAC Controls e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers e A battery powered infrared remote control that snaps into a molded compartment in the center console 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the cen
300. loaded there may be a short delay before the latest 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite downloaded names can be used Until then if avail touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail main screen able for use 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile book from the Phone main screen then select the appro phone is accessible priate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 68 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou WETE touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which EE Ee I a Y OE TS TTL contact and number to choose from your mobile phone nle book When complete the new favorite will be shown z amp Ana Conda Mobile Add to Favorites f 248 123 4567 68 4 tP FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out We 72 Phonebook Fa ot F 248 456 7891 ra e Voicemail mm 248 577 6215 Ve Add from Mobile EJ Favorites Empty Mom s Cell Emergency Towing Assistance NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the e To remove a Favorite select pho
301. low this warning may result in personal injury 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 95 ft lbs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 7 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness
302. lure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow 055007576 1 Worn Tire this warning can result in sudden tire failure You ad THE could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death NS TA TING AND OPERATING 379 Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replac
303. lways be applied whenever the driver is failure anda collision not in the vehicle Continued 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle In addition if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system the Brake Warning Light will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder In the event power assist is lost for any reason ie repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING hy
304. ly NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load
305. ly 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location oy 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The prop
306. ly engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control right side of the steering wheel System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in gt y the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system Poe Y off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise cance f eT A Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on 1 ON OFF 2 RES when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally 4 CANCEL OS SET setthesystem or cause it to go faster than you want NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec You could lose control and have an accident Always tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut leave the system OFF when you are not using it down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
307. m porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control Electronic Refer to
308. mands Can ee Spoken from any screen aller pushing We Uconnect Prone Eie Available commands while phone call is in progress This umrmirnds Gin fea piken from iny ien wha a coll rs aarde als pushing Ihe Lesnnoc veloe command buibor Search for John Smith x Shows the l Number 3 Dial Tones for ass cialed number ar Incoming Incoming phonebook Number ia Dial Tones ere cy In phone number ar call Fist will TEC antry for Jahn for 12342 4 z wilh entry is dialed Voicemail dialed dialed is phone k be shown j Smith wiih all are sent gan ars redialed dial slorer haa numbers Noles 7 in replace Jahn Smh vir an nama e vuaer maille ae Banas phone bdok You can eso Say Call John Smith and use system will aSk yau which phone nummer you war bo call Far Mahis Sraith aL Vou Gin regiae Mobile wilh Hormen Ark os Oes Jl Vou tin pik rodni Gilet wath alaia Gall need GIE or ll ciuis 4 700 Can copied 348 555 1212 wilt any plsona number supported by your Mob phont 5 These commands can be used during a phone call after pishing the Uconriect voe Gonimmnd button on the steering Wheel Mesac note Ie cas will te mulled while the VA season is active E Sunc did bonde for dubomimied ayaa a iuba ehh s call rm ductis T Binnnmp Dal breves in contac names is passie hul only the fins numitor enoouniensd in a canusci name will e sen Fru example il ner is a member slored ux ia Horse and tort numlers T
309. mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first tumed to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver or front passenger s seat belt is unbuck
310. mperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode a
311. n provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022636145 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad 2 Knee Bolster vanced Front Air Bags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflato
312. nd allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Mix Floor and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Attempting to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system ru screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e Itis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e
313. nd reduce your risk of striking the inside of the and cause an accident that includes you This can happen vehicle or being thrown out far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING
314. nd transmission and add as needed may result in damage to the vehicle e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 513 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair
315. nderstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Remote Key This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect Touch M To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your In
316. ndition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 374 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi Hons are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be reguired for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original eguipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire
317. nebook from the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch the Phone main screen on that selected entry When the Options pop up appears To Remove A Favorite 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the 4 Options soft key e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 44 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out We 72 Phonebook gt E ER Mobile E Voicemail Remove from Favs Favorites a Buddy s Pizza r Mom s Cell Emergency e The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps e Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites e Touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 Nw 54 out VW 72 Phonebook gt pie e Voicemail Edit Number Reset to Default Pepe Roni a Buddy s Pizza e The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting th
318. ng Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 388 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
319. ng The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is n
320. nge intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 511 Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 512 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id Once A Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder a
321. nger in the event of a collision Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever Two latches must be released to open the hood near the center of the grille between the grille and hood opening Push the safety latch lever to the right and then 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side raise the hood of the instrument panel 031307222 Underhood Safety Latch Hood Release UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open CAUTION position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood To prevent possible damage e Before closing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips e Do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully la
322. ning LIGHT o s sessie ees 265 354 356 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant via 00 Ve aoa 475 905 Disposal 244440424 bes bane de ie ea DRR 478 DPPEOFGNIEO C ME os Fee odes Ro RR eS 486 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Auto Down Power Windows 39 Auto Unlock Doors EES BEES BERE 4a PES S 31 Automate Dimming MiTO uisa eR 102 Automatic Door Locks less 31 Automate TICACUSINS sua eese PEG Gh ER Re 192 N INDEX 537 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 275 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 319 Automatic Transaxle 00 338 482 Adding Fid se ox rS Ka 483 484 507 il wand aver hess ode eee EU SUPER SOS 484 Fluid and Filter Changes see suce DEER RS 484 Fluid Level Check lt lt i ba265 4444445 483 484 Intetlock yC a eus dede bens ase Gees 339 Reset Mode io ea UV KERSE ED ED S wes 342 Selection Of Lubricant 507 SUNS cy eee SE eee pe DEE fo aa DE an 338 Special MCCUIVES 1544444 BARE 6458 24345 HA 482 werd MEI 343 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 230 Auxillary Power Outlet is sa etre Rs 230 B Pillar Location x9 0433994 49 93x Heed DER 367 Dock LLE aue tipp ERE ERO IR ORE RR st 501 Die 134424922432 Rc ESERRAISNES PES 463 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 LOGUO oe Eer SES BALK Xe oe EO qeu d 463 Belts Seat eue ud eue URS UR EER A on EX 46 91 Body Mechanism Lubrica
323. not be reversed EE C E ce 055707139 Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 383 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure 384 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until
324. now tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must
325. nrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 mi 500 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 A new engine may consume some oil during its first few WARNING Continued thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle
326. ns in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 534 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety S
327. nstrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting T
328. nt Panel Lens Cleaning 490 Interior Appearance Care 2406 does rede ed Rd 489 literere DUE das aed quoe d iuda sedes dab db d d 491 Ititebior LPNS scs edes do DR DE anota ea 196 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 199 nie deelte BIOL aco AA 3x 4 EE EE dedo Inverter Power ag 64 4666 44 34 24654409 e 85 255 Jack LOCO s vw wwe aro d NEE OT EP 428 Jack O Berat scs ms write wee Sw a WEER S 427 431 eeue sa n 4 sain oe vue ch ege EE 431 JO Star 25542 422 eee eae eee HA E RE 439 Key Reminder 3a dos e uet Esc KAAR KA DR ER 14 Key Programming ou os se kke He E ee De ae 17 Key Replacemenb auus vo aE SEKER BARE S yo 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer is 3 ets ER ER RE ES 15 Keyless Enter N Go Keyless Entry System 546 INDEX NEE id EK OE EO OE OE OES D LON 2229290599212 2239292929553 93 192 499 los AR aes 12 ADAD HPP 68 74 91 259 Kee el pe AAR IT LI ES EET 61 PIM AA ENT EE EET FEEL 266 mt koek os bat X 265 356 Lane Change and Turn Signals 195 Automatic Headlighis x24 x qub ded sued 192 Lane CHANG ASSISE En EP ORR RS er wor knars 196 zs AR HE EE EE EE EE 501 Lap older BENG sc usta EER RAELAD e atiti 46 Brake Assist Warning vea 4 2 KEER DES es 360 LATCH Brake Warning ta544 55649482462 DE 264 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 81 83 Bulb Replacement oda cao da enue wo oo ee 499 Ee AE ARK AR oh ROSS EE eas 47 Courtesy Reading a e440 see DEE sade 19
329. ntinued provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HI level setting is selected the 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Manual Front Seat Adjustments For models equipped with manual seats the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor 030936305 Manual Seat Adjustment NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the desired position has been reached Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a
330. o avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle
331. o os d scr d AREAS esas 461 Warning Flasher Hazard a ies sh born es 425 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 259 Warnings and Cautions 26424466 dev Rhe eee s 6 Warranty Information q vvv aou tae epee te bee 530 Washer Addie Fluid cp seco ed RR RAK Spe EE ote en 47 Washers Windshield 198 201 471 Washing Velde uuu euren edes 486 Water Driving TROUGH iis d n dedo rtt dies ay aa 346 Wheel and Wheel Trim uu aca 4024 foe ed a 488 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 5 i00 lt 44 46 488 Wind Bulelin s 04i6 646 Gene eon pe Sag 41 229 Widow DOBPIHE neck td ers d hod eped Soo el pes 326 unes arcc Lr 38 DONC ses decisio d opa erar dest EED d e 38 Windows Express Down 4 2 22 mH Rss 23 Windshield Defroster ia qus ar scs Fd PER ta 91 Windshield Washers 198 201 FING M ER OE OE EE T 471 Windshield Wiper Blades 468 Windshield DERS s siss sessa 9X 99 9 999 Tiesi 198 Wiper Blade Replacement 468 Vier Delay A esaeran ER eaa C 199 Wiper heal 244454 ta eee aga E SOR AN DAE S d rb 250 Wipers Diermen lt oie 465542859408 mee i 199 Wrecker TOWNE 424640445158 90 bee OR EE 446 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person
332. oards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features 207 Mi Instrument Cluster 0008 258 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 259 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 268 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIO Di PIE ss ear pepe eea NUR RARE ARE eae A 270 HEVIC White Telltale Lights s ss ssr ss acsm 272 O EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 272 PLEVIC Ked Telltale Lights sie Ep HER vor 2 8 oO Oil Change Required O Fuel Economy A yenice eed sie Re e urs EET en EE es 278 lip TMG 2 5244 40 De DE ED EE UR DER sees 278 O Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 279 Bl Uconnect Touch Settings 279 O Hard Keys PT 28
333. odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 9 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park p q lights or headlights are turned on 10 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Fach tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufa
334. odule F157 10 Amp Transfer Case Module Red If Equipped Radiator Fan Motor 10 Amp Active Hood Module F158 i Red If Equipped 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ge Lr F159 peu F167 P Amp Powertrain Shutdown 20 Amp Interior Lights 10 Amp Air Conditioner 20 Amp Horn Emissions Partial hicle Motor Cabin Heater 2 If hicle Actuators 50 Am Cabin Heater 1 F162 E Vacuum Pump If Emissions Partial Red Eau 15 Am a quipped F170 Blac Zero Emissions Ve F163 50 Amp 25 Amp Powertrain Auto Shut Yellow F164 Natural down 25 Amp Anti Lock Brake F173 20 Amp Powertrain Shutdown Natural Valves POP Yellow 20 Amp Siren If Equipped F166 20 Amp Spare EO Yellow MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 Cartridge Mini VEHICLE STORAGE Cavity Ese Fuse Description If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 30 Amp Spare 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your F175 Green battery You may F176 NEN 10 Amp e Remove the IOD Ignition Off Draw mini fuses from Red Modules the Totally Integrated Power Module located in the F177 20 Amp All Wheel Drive Mod engine compartment Yellow ule If Equipped l l m 25 Amp Sunroof If Equipped Or disconnect the battery negative cable on REPLACEMENT BULBS F179 EE 10 Amp All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Red Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not 100 Amp Electrohydraulic Steer be used for replacement
335. of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect Touch system For more information on Remote Start Comfort System op eration refer to Uconnect Touch system Uconnect Touch Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward 021836146 Manual Door Lock Knob If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or unlock IB the liftgate WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death Continued 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a ve
336. of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Radio Player Modes 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command In this mode you can say the following commands EVR button NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Command amp vR button volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command Disc system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Towrnichteledise modecay Chancecomceto Dia Voice Command is different than the audio system DE This command can be given in any mode or screen 2 Say a command e g Help e Track to change the track UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode mode in Satellite mode 3 Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will change to 950 change to the change to the change to
337. off and then proceed to the next step 3 Unbuckle the driver s seat belt allow the seat belt to retract and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to completely retract the seat belt each time 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MEE 4 Cycle the ignition to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully com pleted the programming The BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this pro cedure NOTE When the BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled or retracted Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer ca
338. ollows Hard Key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft Key Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Press the blower soft key to enter the blower setting screen Once in the blower setting screen use the UP and DOWN arrows to adjust the blower speed setting or directly select the speed setting by pressing the blower bar area around the blower icon The blower speed increases as you press the UP arrow or move clockwise on the setting scale and decreases when you press the DOWN arrow or move counter clockwise on the setting scale Soft Key Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode if equipped The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equ
339. ons is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when RRS 40 10 Nw Ba the vehicle is not in moving out 68 od FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ow James Butler 9 39 am 12 08 08 Hey Bill am on my way to work Let me know if you have Messaging nbo TUR Pd 14 James Butler Listen New Ed 13 248 576 5459 List
340. ontrol e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet capacity other than what was originally equipped SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load Proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain index could result in tire overloading and failure manufacturer You could lose control and have a collision Continued NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 CAUTION CAUTION Continued To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as following precautions possible and then retighten after driving about e Use chains on 215 65R16 tires onl
341. or Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have programmed Left Hand Switch Functions For Media i e CD Operation e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store
342. or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty
343. or pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id DRIVE Six Speed Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent transmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up D Overdrive Four Speed Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the D Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condit
344. or signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated NS TA TING AND OPERATING 373 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla Hon pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature co
345. ormal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful EVIC information by pressing the switches mounted on the The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following tures a driver interactive display that is loca
346. ost Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech
347. ot damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active
348. ouch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Engine Off Power Delay Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Compass Settings e Variance Touch the Variance soft key to change this display Com pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar De
349. ouch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understandi
350. ould even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver s seat and front passenger s seat the shoul der belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi tion the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 022636144 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than avera
351. ow far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 76 THINGS
352. pose of this cover is for privacy not to heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or l rotect f l e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear P a a A oh axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to cargo area behind the top of the rear seats sway NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 The cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area To install the cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into the left attachment point or the right attachment point shown Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attach ment posts on both ends of the co
353. properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had t
354. r design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAC This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB The SABS are marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e nstrument Panel N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 e Dri
355. r Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment that is located behind the left front fender and is accessible through the wheel well The wheel and tire assemble do not need to be removed to access the compartment Remote battery terminals are located in the engine com partment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Pro cedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the access panel from the inner fender shield 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery
356. r a click Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat 022605394 e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug WARNING as possible e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a actly when installing an infant or child restraint child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind A rearward facing child restraint should only be their back used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy NOTE For additional information refer to www s
357. r door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver HeatedlVentilated Seat With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When temperatures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Sea
358. rake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired b
359. rd to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or May 4L Head Restraint Front Half not deploy in the event of a front or side impact Soft Foam and Trim Coen However if during a front impact a secondary rear 4 Head Restraint Guide 2 Seatback Tub impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever Hee ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
360. re tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time 376 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the
361. regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior
362. rence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Uconnect Phone Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smiths Mobile e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features e Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS e Sending a text message via the touch screen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pai
363. requency of Fluid Change aas memi 485 Lubricant Selection 4 999 25999290643 485 Manual Service 2440446455546 93er Ab ES S 531 Ma p R adine DIES 14222 4444 6 pare dee sd ed 198 Marker Lights Side sere neon de RE o rra 499 Master Cylinder Brakes is does cm at Saba s 480 Methanol ATTORE RE OE KO SH OSs BRO FR 394 Mini Hip Computer s 455 8 3 2 P sews 278 Mirrors face 6h 8 MAG DO He EE ES EER 101 219 A toma c DIMMINE cavededden VEER KRY 102 Electric Powered een 103 Electric Remote vw kie RE dd Gao BESS 103 Exterior BOS 224544 markus Hede beers 104 Heated ii sinode eeu dud eae ad hs be ve es 104 Outside ONE OE OR EE ORN EE ES 102 Rearview SS ee es 101 p c 3454646008 oe ve eee ee HER RARR 104 Mode POC Saver lt 49 4 656 40 64 2n45 e RA 2s 276 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 N INDEX 549 Monitor Tire Pressure System 2854462500465 383 lee AE RA FEE Ege ee doi d 457 930 MIBE ETDE 2s4e4225224ceeeoneeqes wa 394 Multi Function Control Lever 195 Navigation System Uconnect gps 215 New Vehicle Break In Period 88 Occ pant TOC IPIE oude dae eee ee duces 42 67 71 Occupant Restraints Sedan 64 65 67 70 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 393 506 Odomeler 24 44435 KERE ERORE AE BAAR Hie ee 261 Oil Change Indi alor sess sor Eie ee bi Re HET 262 275 Oil Change Indicator Reset 262 275 Oil Piller Mir
364. ress and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you h
365. right position lean back lift the lever lean forward and then release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position Recline Lever Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Seatback Armrest Second Row Passenger Seat The latch release loop is located at the top of the seatback armrest Pull the release loop forward to re lease the latch and then downward to lower the seatback armrest Seatback Armrest Raise the seatback armrest and lock it in place when not in use or when additional seating area is required UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be certain that the seatback armrest is locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Stadium Tip n Slide Easy Entry Exit Seat Seven Passenger Models This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the third row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle To Move The Second Row Passenger Seat Forward NOTE Raise the seatback armrest before moving the seat to allow for full seat tr
366. ring up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect
367. rity Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE um e The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
368. river and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MEE Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 1
369. river s door 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To open the unlocked liftgate sgueeze the handle and pull the liftgate toward you Gas props will raise and support the liftgate in the open position 022236320 Liftgate Release NOTE Because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle These fumes could injure you and your passengers Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the climate control is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint if equipped Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC that span the front second and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Ba
370. ront end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the ON RUN position If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi PN mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes d
371. roperly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 7 X 7 V8 V9 A 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back sof
372. roves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on the engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Com partment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Dispo
373. rtain lamps in the left headlamp housing 2 Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the headlamp housing 1 Front Turn Signal Park Lamp Bulb 2 Side Marker Lamp Bulb 3 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb 4 High Beam Headlamp Bulb 81dd40a9 3 Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and then connect the replacement bulb 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 2 Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp housing contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol N 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the N ASM headlamp housing and rotate it 1 4 turn clockwise to lock jy gt e it in place di Front Fog Lamp is NOTE Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the 3 Sgueeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and wheel well pull straight out from the fog lamp 1 Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel well access panel and remove the access panel N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 CAUTION Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp 1 Open the liftgate Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamina
374. rvice TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will turn on and a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds upon the next ignition switch cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitori
375. rvoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 1 of washer fluid when the message LoWASH appears in the instrument cluster WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex WARNING Continued haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep over materials that can burn Such materials might into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the be grass or leaves coming into contact with
376. s are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Mn A 030936173 Power Seat Switch 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the se
377. s during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at
378. s eee 352 Distribution Center Fuses 494 DOr LOCKS 2204349424 TX EATUR RE DE 30 gs A sage sd EDE eg DiE pe RR eee 299 NTON er bu E OS EE ET PER 103 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 230 Deals wash y Schnee ER PET eee OE 167 EE s pousse qc RERO HERO 348 349 DHDFODI 22 RE wie T ERU P RIA RARE ER RS 227 TE ler DIE pace ERE dog nodo CR Bn ER ded 485 uus Tr 45 0n25860446462 G45 ous 38 Windows Express Down 26 Power eis Elle 44964 quare Hap HR en s 507 Power Transfer Unit esee 485 507 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 60 Preparation Tor Jacking ioa due urna aem ees 428 Pretensioners Deal DES sen 54 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry suse siat ord d Ge Sonia 21 Radial PI DES usa auae xy diua d E EROR DE RUE 374 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 477 Radio Operation siene bes qae Rue abe s 310 Radio Remote Controls s gone Ro 9 SOR goes 308 Rear AM CORNdIBORIHD ass vicsee ex vies ORR 321 Rear Axle Differential 000 485 Rear Gamers 146 sson bande oh eee EE eee ous 215 Rear Cupholder 43 2 4d ek RE besos PR AO RR 297 N INDEX 551 Rear Drive esel 3st eios REKE S oa Ss 485 Rear LOOTE iss pads pes DE PRE ER PD eS 41 Rear Park Sense Systemi soas hd nieces ag es 206 Rear Seat Pole aegra eos tc Sek os 180 187 Rear Window Defroster ia we pda digas N VR 252 Rear Window Features ua eese aam emn 250 Rear Wiper W
379. s equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the
380. s on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the EVR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EvR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry and or Last Name as Voice Password then if you press the EvR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encoun
381. s screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 e Units
382. s vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even normal conditions However in an accident the belt will on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver lock a
383. seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the air bag system in thi
384. select the first gear ratio Starting out in second gear is helpful in snow or icy conditions To select second gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop tap the shift lever to the right once e Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged If a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually selected ratio however If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EGUIPPED This feature provides on demand All Wheel Drive AWD The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills reguired Under normal driving conditions the front wheels provide most of the traction If the front wheels begin to lose traction power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels The greater the front wheel traction loss the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels Additionally on dry pavement
385. selection touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Remote Door Unlock Order Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft key to change this display When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On Ist Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors On 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all the doors or use the RKE transmitter e Memory Linked to FOB Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key to
386. side air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS z and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle a set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows D Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level Sm with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or Y dark set the Mode control to Bi Level zz with A C on Adjust Temperature O i control for comfort COOL OR COLD Sot the Mode control to Mix or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and bo TV Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 644 AE GOLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor A_ If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set t
387. sides of the vehicle may deploy e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im prove
388. sing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Ai
389. ss H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light with severe usage such as trailer towing If this run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off This light indicates that the transmission fluid light turns on safely pull over and stop the CAUTION temperature is running hot This may occur vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in t
390. st be driven slowly when using Park View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens CAUTION Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio 1 Turn the Radio on e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Press the More soft key drive path 3 Press the Settings soft key Continued 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Courtesy Reading Lights Backup Camera to enable disable The overhead console has two courtesy lights The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is OVERHEAD CONSOLE opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights Entry RKE the lig
391. straints AHR Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 dem 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head Active Head Restraint Normal Position 022607494 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHI
392. strument Panel for further information Remote Open Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Programming Additional Transmitters 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be screwdriver into the slot and gentl
393. supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the vr button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a n
394. switch briefly e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s and front passenger s power window switch has an Auto up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto up operation push down on the switch briefly 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and objects from the window path before closing the window Such en trapment may result in serious injury Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto up Auto down feature To do so perform the following steps 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim p
395. system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the connect Phone button Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing ihe Uconnect voice command button Call John Smith ia Noes Mobile gt see Redial Shows the phonebook Dial Tones entry for John for 12344 Smith with all are sent Last Last number or incoming Incoming Phonebook phone number or call list will screen will dialed is phoneis be shown redialed dial Dial Tones for numbers stored in Voicemail password are sent Notes 1 You can replace John Smith with amy name in your mobile or favorites phone book You can also say Call John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to call for John Smath 2 You can replace Mobile with Home Work ar Other 3 You can replace Incoming calle with oulgoing calls missed calls or all calls 4 You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone 5 These commands can be used during a p
396. t if it interferes with the Head Restraint recline the seatback slightly to remove the interference To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint For center seating position adjust the head restraint to the upward position and route the tether strap between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint Then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 022637299 Tether Strap Mounting 2 If necessary move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 FA Seat Track Release Lever 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An u
397. t and side window demister outlets u NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the Defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger and rear temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature NOTE When SYNC is ON and the driver selects Mix or Defrost Mode Rear mode will be Floor 14 Temperature Control Manual Temperature Control Only Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the te
398. t can be folded flat This allows for ex tended cargo space and still maintains some seating room if needed NOTE Prior to folding the second row passenger seat make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position This will allow the second row seat to fold easily N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 WARNING To Fold The Seat 1 Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat the seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly On seven passenger models do not allow a pas senger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Saatback Release 2 Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle pressure 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 3 Lift the control lever with the other hand allow the To Unfold The Seat seatback to move forward slightly and then release the Raise the seatback and lock it in place lever WARNING WARNING NING Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into To prevent personal in
399. t key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Fo
400. t key e Auto High Beams Touch the Auto High Beams soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Steering Directed Lights Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Headlights With Lock Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 feature selected To make
401. tandard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 536 INDEX NEE Id About Your Brakes SS 350 352 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 353 354 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 476 POCO TMC 20 23 ee arx RO RR seh anode ees 401 Adding Washer FIUIG 4 4 a ot RE ae aw ages 471 diie GUC conan e rece ao but d un s ge aya 395 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 462 Air Conditioner Maintenance 465 Pie Eonditioiuas Filter xe tod VERE 326 466 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 465 466 Air Conditioning 5YSIODIE ves se iri ode oe 319 465 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 327 Air Conditioning Rear Zone ue ace mi xum aaa RE 321 Air Pressure Tires llle 3 2 ur A P 61 70 Ambas Deployment rsrsrsr HER EROR SR RE 71 ANDIE ACH soon d e dore P RECS 68 74 91 259 Arba Waimntenance eau ed xa TREER bes be 73 PUA ide iss eee ied KERSE EP EE 64 67 70 Airbag Window Side Curtain 65 67 70 Alarm Security Alat 45 4 e EES ee SORS P 4 iti 17 PIC EP ooie teen ec ane RES sae QE NS 266 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alarm DS 406 ks bed MEE OE ek ER ED TIT 23 All Wheel Drive AWD ess 345 Alterations Modifications Vehicle Anti Lock Brake System ABS 353 354 Anti Lock War
402. tched before driving your m vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open Hood Prop Rod when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Headlights On With Wipers Available With
403. tectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map LA e Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks did Audio e Equalizer Touch the Equalizer soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Balance Fade Touch the Balance Fade soft ke
404. ted in the l e Radio Info instrument cluster Fuel Economy Vehicle Speed Trip Info N e Tire Pressure e Vehicle Information e Warning Message Displays e Turn Menu OFF 041040516 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel N ward through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus or sub menus Press and hold 040909599 the SELECT button for two seconds to reset E features EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EE BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted L Gate ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote start active Push Start Button Wrong Key Damaged Key e Key not programmed
405. tem will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 system This noise should be considered normal and it checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are does not in any way damage the steering system apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho WARNING rized dealer Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of th
406. ter console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to your Uconnect Touch User s Manual for detailed operating instructions iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch User s Manual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right hand controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches SS aur 045035190 Remote Sound Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel Right Hand Switch Functions e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Left Hand Switch Functions F
407. tered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The amp vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More hard key then touch the Settings soft key 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phon
408. terference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal 2 distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE e RKE PANIC button not pressed The vere heh ad wih bo es maa e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob e Vehicle theft alarm not active may reduce this range e Ignition in OFF position How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the WARNING engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or I confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon EE EE oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisono
409. tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door rein WARNING forcement e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the CAUTION tank is being filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Failure to follow this warning may result in seri ous injury or death the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 403 on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
410. th and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The roof rack side rails on your vehicle are NOT designed to carry a load without the addition of crossbars Cross bars can be purchased from MOPAR accessories to provide a functional roof rack system NOTE Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR acces sories See your authorized dealer External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity The roof rack cross rails and side rails together are designed to carry cargo weight The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and it should be distributed uniformly over the cross rails 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E CAUTION CAUTION Continued e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfb
411. the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint i c 030933390 Adjustment Button NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If any of the head restraints require removal see your authorized dealer 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and e For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle WARNING Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Third Row Passenger Seats Seven Passenger Models These head restraints are non adjustable and non removable However you can fold them forward when they are not in use by passengers Refer to 50 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats With Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models for further information locked in place Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passenger in the event of a collision 60 40 Split Second Row Passenger Seats To provide additional storage area each second row passenger sea
412. the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over steer or under steer e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off for additional informa tion Partial Off The ESC OFF button is located in the switch bank above the climate control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC OFF button and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF button and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation STARTING
413. the detected obstacle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status NE 156789mi 102 F Park Assist Press P for Park R Rear Park Assist Display 032835530 NE 156789mi 102 F Park Assist System OFF 032835529 Rear Park Assist OFF The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous NE 156789mi 102 F Park Assist Press P for Park R Slow Tone 032835531 NE _156789mi_ Park Assist 102 F Press P for Park Fast Tone R UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 032835532 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera n tion when the system is detecting an obstacle NE 156789mi 102 F w Press P for Park H Continuous Tone 032835533 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 WARNING ALERTS Rear
414. the respective seat belts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert Programming NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition being cycled to the ON RUN position 1 With all doors closed and the ignition in any position except ON RUN buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
415. the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should turn on and remain on for four to six seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting or if the light stays on flickers or turns on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly att
416. the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 385 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
417. the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 successfully accepted the freguency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate p
418. ting sexe pee mererin asas 530 Safety Information Tire 362 Pately MIDS aim Eun x RS eee d bus ee ee Ae ee 89 Safety Exhaust Gas amp mee va nev domne GE RA 42 90 Schedule Maintenance leen 510 Seat Belt Maintenance sien buch th RR 491 Heat belt Remindef ceveceseueteaesd HD EE 58 Seat Belts 4252s kbeucacerhGcted av SOS 42 46 91 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 5l And Pregnant Women 54242720425 e40s54s 60 Child Restraint 75 76 79 85 Extender tesame E Re E S dE YS 60 Front Seat leeren 46 47 LS DECHDII ii xs yee ee ee HR OE een RUE S 91 Operating Instructions a eva SP KP as HE 47 PretemslONChs sede EST ho55555 555 54 Reat eat A X 46 Untwisting Procedure 1245992222 29223 pi gt 22209 94 5 RA EN ee EU BOUE AUR eee ded 167 ZOTHSL OBI es aed eder 4 OE ARE dab qd ed 167 Child Booster eee eee eee 77 Eis HWW sense aa BEd ace SPR DAE 185 CACO us dade EE EE N ELE 169 LHeie nr Adjustaient 34 sake a AAR Ee DRR 167 174 POWB 22358 RE OROS ARE HARE 167 Rea Folding 2v mare v3 OR Era Pes 180 187 IN Srl ii gu M Pr 173 Recline RGAE o vss bands one DE oe dem qus 184 187 Seatback Release 174 180 187 TANS P EE EE SEED oo 167 Security Alarm Theft Alarm IZ Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 475 506 Selection of Oil 2 Rad RE bee EER HIE ipiis 460 Sentry Key Immobilizer cs 23640445624 RE Rs 19 Sentry K
419. tion 468 lori c AM 77 Brake wesley Sle steen 4 DAE wees ae RENS 356 Brake Control System Electronic 354 Drake IMIG aoe guar vane v uda d vx UP x oes 507 Brake oylemi a do Re aw Me Sor d dcos i a ee 352 480 Anti Lock ABS ua o uiro d vena SERE ded t 353 354 Hd CHECK wesasebeke4iG E PX ESPERE 480 507 Master tC RE OO He Rae e 480 POURING 2x4 83 EE ARE EST EF 350 Warn LIN 2 tenner tne ean eee aeons 264 Drake DONIS otannesan yi EE OE AE sans 350 Brake Transaxle Interlock 339 lori TP TET Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 538 INDEX NEE Id Brightness Interior Lights soas ERROR RED EER RS 196 Bulb Keplacement 542320044 Bo SERE a ems 497 499 Bulbs EISE sae sense ADS KORE 93 497 Camera Rear lt sinc 6 os amp ea EES ee eae AE 215 Capacities Fluid ase ede sop n DERE s 505 Caps Filler PCL 401 OIL IEBSIIB iseer REDE BEDE ss 453 461 Power DIESE ars din da tat REM EER gig 349 Radiator Coolant Pressure 477 Car cru m 486 Carbon Monoxide Warning 90 397 Cargo Vehicle Loading 246 403 Cargo Ara OVER 24454240 tr nega s eae ea 248 Cargo Area FeatUresS vy oe Vibes RE REDE 245 Cargo Compartiment x ox ORR ee iir tti 245 LIB 2459992059 ER IT OE ETE RS 245 Loo oa e Canter sagas RR dias DEE 253 arco Hood FOOF 4 4424 ene be 65 oe RA TNEESUMPRS 246 Cargo Management System 246 Rol
420. tion extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021335339 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in U
421. tion pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check Turn Signal and High Beam Indicator Lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors B Inside Day Night Mirror o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped D Outside Mirrors O Power Mirrors O Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped 3 Manual Folding Mirrors If Equipped o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 101 102 102 103 104 104 104 104 ll Uconnect Phone ee 105 B Dconnect Touch 4 3 sade RE BREER ED 105 Eed eus x RURSUS Ebor RES Ea Rob RE RUN 108 O Phone Call Features SS SS SS ss 114 DO Uconnect Phone Features 118 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 123 H Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone sacs aca eh Ge eh E Res SE 123 O General Information 222622 o xmas 127 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M W Wconnect Phone sorde secuRhMPR E RE 127 MEESTE EE O
422. tion will severely shorten bulb life If the 2 Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the taillamp housing bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place 5 Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and fasteners Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp The taillamps are a two piece design The tail stop rear turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body panels The tail and backup lamps are located in the liftgate 073310814 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the body panel and the outboard side of the 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id taillamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange on the inboard side of the taillamp housing with the other hand Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the taillamp housing from the vehicle 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillamp housing 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the taillamp housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clock wise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners Changing The Backup Lamp 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two fasteners retaining
423. tomatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position T Child Protection Door Lock Function 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is N engaged the door can be opened only by using the Outside door handle even though the inside door lo
424. tor Cap 477 COOU AE t4 qs de bee oes TRE RE RU 474 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 476 Coolant Capac as E Ee sees nese ns tees 505 Coolant Level os 2426564604424 RE 474 478 Disposal of Used Coolant 478 Drain Flush and Refill 474 bi se OPERA AL ES EIER Er 478 Points to Remember Ls 478 les die COD an es nae s MESURE EED 477 Radiator Cap AT SE TES ES dae 477 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 475 505 506 Corrosion Protection eee eee 486 CCUDDIOIdGES ies 3 2 9 P 9 Up Sep Dio E ED 237 491 Customer Assistance eee 527 Data Recorder Event 22 224222 ua 74 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 197 Daytime Running Lights lt 5 oes ek ee 4s 194 Dealer Service SS EE EE ns 457 Defroster Rear Window 252 Defroster Windshield oT Id Delay Intermittent Wipers Diagnostic System Onboard Dimmer Switch Headlight Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle Oil Engine Power Steering Disabled Vehicle Towing Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 276 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 307 od ua ease EE OT ER OE T PEU 397 Electric Remote Mirrors uui does 9 Hi di as 103 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Po
425. tored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will display a pop up showing Answer or Ignore Press the Answer soft key or the button on the steering wheel to accept the call N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up showing Answer Ignore or Transfer Press the So button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
426. ts soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once p
427. u of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status press and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Park Assist Touch the Park Assist soft key to change this display The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status press and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information e Blind Spot Alert Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft key to change this dis play When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in
428. u will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id In addition there are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback near to the floor 022637298 Tether Strap Anchors Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchor and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchor and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchors Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint For center seating position adjust the head restraint to the upward position and route the tether strap between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint Then
429. ued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 415 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight
430. umber with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone
431. under heavy throttle input where one may have no wheel spin torque will be sent to the rear in a pre emptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear
432. up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the b
433. us and can cause serious Pet closed injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Liftgate closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start e HAZARD switch off System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Battery at an acceptable charge level N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e f an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e
434. ver into the notches in the trim panels Lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover WARNING A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could cause injury in a collision It could become airborne during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mount ing Do not store it in the vehicle REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear window wiper washer control is located on the left side of the steering column N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release the wiper will cycle three times before returning to the set position 031536316 Rear Wiper Washer N Rotate the switch upward to the first detent posi tion for rear wiper operation Rear Wiper Washer Control If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return Rotate the switch upward past the first detent position to activate the rear washer The washer 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the CAUTION Continued wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at e Always
435. ver Side Knee Air Bag Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB sensors e Knee Impact Bolster e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an SABIC impact that requires air bag deployment This low output MT ER Side impac Sensors is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors e Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags may provide No objects should be placed over or near the air enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a bag on the instrument panel because oy such side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a As Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the ae severe enough to cause the air bag to Outboard side o
436. vi Greater Don 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Display Message Park Assist On Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF Uconnect Touch System The available choices are Off message for approximately five seconds Refer to Elec Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The ParkSense system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia ParkSense provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Service The ParkSense Rear Park
437. water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering sys
438. wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 523 WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per SA Gas ERROR TETTETETT 927 O Prepare For The Appointment 527 APrepare A List 64444 d eed apne ade rra D24 o Be Reasonable With Requests 527 W If You Need Assistance 527 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 528 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 528 Hn Medco Contactes 2a a Ee AD RAS oru 528 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 529 EESOPVUIOO CONUGC 41004654 spe ER nase aoa 229 W Warranty Information 530 EM MOPAR Parts pens siese acc o BEE 530 Bl Reporting Safety
439. wer Anchor oe A and B If placing a sec ond child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 40 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E DO NOT USE Middle 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchorage Loops B and C 2 Middle 60 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops B and C If placing a sec ond child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 40 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E DO NOT USE Outer 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops A and B 3 Outer 40 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops D and E If placing a sec ond child seat in the vehicle use Outer 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops A and B or Middle 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops B and C NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system NOTE When installing a child restraint if it interferes with the Head Restraint recline the seatback slightly to remove the interference lf 022637297 The lower anchors are round bars located at the X rear of the seat cushion where it meets the Latch Anchorages seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint Yo
440. wer Outlet 230 Electrical Power Outlets si a3 ware SES PEN OS 230 Electronic Brake Control System 354 Anti Lock Brake System mud ver4pee ETE 353 Brake Assist Systemi 6 4s uec RR RE EE SA des 356 Electronic Roll Mitigation lt sada 240 EE aw 357 Electronic Stability Program 358 Iraction Control SYSIEM ave dosars ca Rs 357 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 357 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 203 Electronic Stability Program ESP 358 Electronic Vehicle Information Center IE 25254542 Ee DER AA aan es 215 268 N INDEX 541 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 6 5 443 Hazard Warning Flasher qai RE es 425 EKS e P M 427 JUMP DEE EE ue eds a deca ie e N Die 439 OVEMNCAtING sos aR RR OR RD RE BR RD 5 425 TOWING P ee Aono nee Pe eee eS n BR 446 Emission Control System Maintenance 456 Ia PC C TIT 88 453 Pi ciu TP 462 DIOGK Holt say eoe SUR a Pan HAAG Die 338 Break In Recommendations 88 Checkmg Oil Level nee aaa s hal gees tees 459 Compalen auos Eu eR RN EUREN Yee 453 454 Compartment Identification 454 Coolant Antifreeze llle 474 506 CODING sis pos 2 PSI OPES EE HERE SS 474 Exhaust Gas Caution 42 90 397 Laus tO Stal uis sr Ere MERKER PREFERI 337 Isl re rere Sr Po cuc roa ss SEK RE de HE EERS EE 337 Pael Reduitemelis os ke EER ORE RR OR RIDE 393 Op Otro
441. whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door or liftgate This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON posi
442. y of the range marking 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil imp
443. y Dae Oa e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the vehicle manufacturer ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest Continued different maximum speeds This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country reguire the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle S
444. y etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 4 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator f Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at sp
445. y and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING e Modificat
446. y another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality 394 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate
447. y pry the two halves of performed at an authorized dealer the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the Transmitter Battery Replacement ee ee The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Separating RKE Transmitter Case 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a 021337430 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any in
448. y supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 CAUTION 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission AE SE Ge do 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check 2 4L Engine Use the following procedure to check the automatic transmission fluid level properly 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then 1 Park the vehicle on level ground remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position the lower two holes in the area marked COLD ending with the lever in PA
449. y to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Speed Adjusted Volume Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft key to change this display This feature increases or decreases volume rela tive to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the OFF 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound Touch the Surround Sound soft key to change this dis play This feature provides simulated surround sound 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip Then touch the arrow back soft key e Subscription Info New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe
450. you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the handheld transmitter 13 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage This can usually be found where the han
451. you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed 400 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below OF 18 C In the ran

"service manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;service manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"service manual"